Skip to main content

Full text of "Studies in the linguistic sciences"

See other formats


studies 

in    the 

Linguistic    Sciences 


VOLUME  32,  NUMBER  2 
(FALL  2002) 

f 

PAPERS  IN  GENERAL  LINGUISTICS 


/  '       .  ' 


6 1  [di'partmoiit]  [ov]  [liij'gwistiks 

\  \  cvcvcccvcc   vc  cvcccvccvcc 
\  \  ^\\\/  \w/    1/  ///  f/// v^/ 


=>ARTMENT  OF  LINGUISTICS 
IIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS  AT  URB ANA-CHAMPAIGN 


STUDIES  IN  THE  LINGUISTIC  SCIENCES 

(ISSN  0049-2388) 

PUBLICATION  OF  THE  DEPARTMENT  OF  LINGUISTICS 

WITH  SUPPORT  OF  THE  HUMANITIES  COUNCIL  IN  THE 

COLLEGE  OF  LIBERAL  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS  AT  URBANA-CHAMPAIGN 

Managing  Editor:  Peter  Lasersohn 
EDITORIAL  ASSISTANTS:  Hee  Youn  Cho.  Aimee  Johansen 

Editorial  Board:  Elmer  Antonsen,  Karlos  Arregi.  Elabbas  Benmamoun. 
Rakesh  Bhatt,  Eyamba  G.  Bokamba.  Chin-Chuan  Cheng,  Jennifer  S.  Cole, 
Georgia  M.  Green,  Hans  Henrich  Hock,  Jose  I.  Hualde,  Braj  B.  Kachru,  Yamuna 
Kachru,  Chin-W.  Kim,  Charles  W.  Kisseberth,  Peter  Lasersohn.  Molly  Mack, 
Howard  Maclay,  Jerry  L.  Morgan,  Rajeshwari  Pandharipande,  Chilin  Shih, 
Richard  Sproat,  James  H.  Yoon,  and  Ladislav  Zgusta. 

AIM:  SLS  is  intended  as  a  forum  for  the  presentation  of  the  latest  original  re- 
search by  the  faculty  and  students  of  the  Department  of  Linguistics.  University  of 
Illinois,  Urbana-Champaign.  Scholars  outside  the  Department  and  from  other 
institutions  are  also  cordially  invited  to  submit  original  linguistic  research  for 
consideration.  In  all  cases,  articles  submitted  for  publication  will  be  reviewed  by 
a  panel  of  at  least  two  experts  in  the  appropriate  field  to  determine  suitability  for 
publication.  Copyright  remains  with  the  individual  authors.  Authors  of  articles 
will  receive  one  copy  of  the  particular  issue  and  10  offprints  of  their  individual 
contributions. 

SLS  appears  twice  a  year,  and  one  issue  is  traditionally  devoted  to  restricted, 
specialized  topics.  A  complete  list  of  available  back  issues  is  on  the  last  page  of 
this  issue. 

BOOKS  FOR  REVIEW:  Review  copies  of  books  may  be  sent  to: 
Review  Editor,  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences 
Department  of  Linguistics,  4080  For.  Lang.  Bldg., 
University  of  Illinois 
707  S.  Mathews, 
Urbana,IL  61801,  USA 

SUBSCRIPTION:  Requests  for  subscriptions  should  be  addressed  to  SLS  Sub- 
scriptions. Department  of  Linguistics.  4080  Foreign  Languages  Building,  Univer- 
sity of  Illinois.  707  South  Mathews.  Urbana,  Illinois  61801. 

Price:  S20.00  per  single  issue. 

e-mail  address:  slingsci@uiuc.edu 

Telephone:  (217)  333-3563 

Fax: (217)  244-8430 

Homepage:  http://www.linguistics.uiuc.edu/sls/index.html 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2011  with  funding  from 

University  of  Illinois  Urbana-Champaign 


http://www.archive.org/details/studiesinlinguis322univ 


STUDIES  IN  THE  LINGUISTIC  SCIENCES 

Papers 

in 
General  Linguistics 

EDITED  BY 
Peter  Lasersohn 

EDITORIAL  ASSISTANTS 

Hee  Youn  Cho 
Aimee  Johansen 


VOLUME  32,  NUMBER  2 
(FALL  2002) 


DEPARTMENT  OF  LINGUISTICS 
UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS  AT  URB ANA-CHAMPAIGN 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


Timothy  L.  Face  and  Scott  M.  Alvord:  Descriptive  adequacy  vs. 
psychological  reality:  The  case  of  two  restrictions  on 
Spanish  stress  placement  1 

Jose  Ignacio  Hualde  and  Itziar  Aramaio:  Accentual  variation  and 

convergence  in  northeastern  Bizkaian  Basque  17 

Aimee  Johansen:  Kiswahili  naming  of  days  of  the  week  in  a  wider 

context  of  day  name  borrowings  39 

Regina  Morin:  English/Spanish  language  contact  on  the  internet: 

Linguistic  borrowing  of  many  stripes  43 

Keun  Young  Shin:  Two  types  of  negation  not  and  scope  ambiguities  63 

Asha  Tickoo:  On  information  packaging  and  hearer  engagement 

in  Kashmiri  narrative  73 


REVIEWS 

Peter  Lasersohn:  Review  of  Jeffrey  C.  King:  Complex  Demonstratives: 

A  Quantificational  Account  91 

James  H.  Yang:  Review  of  Saran  Kaur  Gill:  English  Language  Challenges 

for  Malaysia:  International  Communication  95 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences 
Volume  32,  Number  2  (Fall  2002) 

DESCRIPTIVE  ADEQUACY  VS.  PSYCHOLOGICAL  REALITY:  THE 
CASE  OF  TWO  RESTRICTIONS  ON  SPANISH  STRESS  PLACEMENT* 

Timothy  L.  Face  and  Scott  M.  Alvord 

University  of  Minnesota 

facex002@umn.edu,  alvor002@umn.edu 

This  paper  examines  two  supposed  restrictions  on  Spanish  stress 
placement:  1)  the  heavy  penult  condition,  which  prohibits  stress 
leftward  of  the  penultimate  syllable  if  the  penultimate  syllable  is  heavy, 
and  2)  the  three-syllable  window  condition,  which  prohibits  stress  other 
than  on  one  of  the  final  three  syllables  of  a  word.  While  these  two 
conditions  are  clearly  descriptively  adequate  generalizations  about  the 
lexicon,  this  study  sets  out  to  determine  whether  they  are 
psychologically  real  restrictions,  serving  as  constraints  that  prohibit 
words  that  violate  them.  The  results  of  a  perception  study  indicate  that 
neither  of  these  conditions  is  a  psychologically  real  restriction  on 
Spanish  stress  placement.  While  the  present  study  adds  another  type  of 
evidence  to  recent  claims  that  Spanish  is  not  quantity  sensitive,  it  goes  a 
step  further  with  respect  to  the  heavy  penult  condition  by  claiming  that 
words  that  violate  this  condition  are  not  disallowed  by  Spanish  at  all. 
With  respect  to  the  three-syllable  window  condition,  this  study  is  the 
first  to  claim  that  this  exceptionless  generalization  about  Spanish  stress 
is  nothing  more  than  a  generalization  over  words  in  the  lexicon,  and  is 
not  a  true  restriction  on  Spanish  stress  placement. 

1.       Introduction 

In  the  quest  to  explain  the  Spanish  stress  system,  at  least  two  major  restrictions  on 
Spanish  stress  placement  have  been  taken  for  granted  by  many  investigators:  1) 
the  heavy  penult  condition,  and  2)  the  three-syllable  window  condition.  The  heavy 
penult  condition  states  that  Spanish  does  not  allow  words  with  stress  on  the 
antepenultimate  syllable  if  the  penultimate  syllable  is  heavy  (i.e.,  * 
'CVC.CVC.CV).  While  the  heavy  penult  condition  is  often  tied  to  the  role  of 
quantity  sensitivity  in  Spanish  stress  assignment,  which  has  been  a  topic  of  debate 
over  the  last  several  years  (e.g.,  Alvord  2003;  Barkanyi  2002;  Face  2000,  2004; 
Harris  1983;  Lipski  1997;  Roca  1990),  the  heavy  penult  condition  itself  has  almost 
always  been  considered  a  productive  restriction  on  Spanish  stress  placement, 
whether  explained  by  quantity  sensitivity  or  in  another  way.'  The  evidence  in 


*  We  would  like  to  thank  an  anonymous  reviewer  as  well  as  the  audience  at  the  7'"  Hispanic  Linguistics 
Symposium  (Albuquerque,  16-18  October  2003)  for  useful  comments  and  suggestions  on  an  earlier  version 
of  this  paper. 

'  We  want  to  be  clear  in  our  distinction  here.  The  term  quantity  sensitivity  is  often  used  in  Spanish  to  refer 
to  the  lack  of  stress  leftward  of  a  heavy  penultimate  syllable.  However,  quantity  sensitivity  is  merely  an 

©  2005  Timothy  L.  Face  &  Scott  M.  Alvord 


2  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

support  of  the  heavy  penult  condition  is  that,  with  the  exception  of  a  few 
toponyms  and  borrowings,  Spanish  has  no  words  in  violation  of  this  condition. 
The  three-syllable  window  condition  has  also  been  taken  as  an  indisputable 
restriction  on  Spanish  stress  placement.  The  evidence  for  the  three-syllable 
window  condition  is  that  there  exist  no  Spanish  words  where  stress  falls  outside  of 
the  last  three  syllables  (e.g.,  *  'CV.CV.CV.CV).  Apparent  exceptions  to  this  in  the 
orthographical  system  are  the  result  of  one  or  more  enclitic  pronouns  being 
attached  to  the  lexical  word  in  orthography  (e.g.,  digamelo  'tell  me  it').  But  no 
lexical  word  violates  the  three-syllable  window  condition. 

While  these  apparent  restrictions  on  Spanish  stress  placement  are 
descriptively  true,  not  all  descriptively  true  statements  about  a  language  are 
representative  of  the  psychological  reality  of  the  speakers  of  that  language. 
Kiparsky  (1982)  puts  it  quite  clearly  in  discussing  Hale's  (1973)  findings  for 
passive  formation  in  Maori  (further  discussed  in  Hualde  2000),  that  the  simplest 
analysis  of  the  data  do  not  represent  the  behavior  of  speakers  in  cases  of 
borrowings,  change  in  progress,  etc.  The  relevant  data  are  shown  in  (1). 

(1)      verb  passive  verb  passive 


awhi 

awhitia  'to  embrace' 

mau 

mauria  'to  carry' 

hopu 

hopukia  'to  catch' 

wero 

werohia  'to  stab' 

am 

arumia  'to  follow' 

patu 

patua  'to  strike,  kill' 

tohu 

tohugia  'to  point  out' 

kite 

kitea  'to  see,  find' 

Kiparsky  (1982:68)  states  that: 

If  we  wanted  an  'A'  on  our  exam,  we  would,  of  course,  say  that  the 
underlying  forms  are  /awhit/,  /hopuk/,  /maur/,  etc.,  and  that  the  suffix  is 
/ia/....If  someone  were  to  say  that  the  underlying  forms  are  /awhi/, 
/hopu/,  /mau/,  etc.,  he'd  flunk.  What  Hale  shows  is  that  Maori  children 
learning  their  language  flunk  this  'exam' ...  .There  is  strong  evidence 
that  the  'clever'  analysis  is  not  psychologically  correct.  The 
psychologically  correct  grammar  of  Maori  has  /tia/  as  the  basic  ending 
and  /kia/,  /ria/  etc.,  as  a  set  of  allomorphs  used  in  verbs  that  have  to  be 
lexically  marked  as  taking  them. 

The  Maori  data  are  just  one  example  of  cases  where  descriptively  true 
statements  do  not  correspond  to  psychological  realities.  This  has  been  discussed 
by  many  linguists,  including  a  growing  number  of  studies  on  Spanish  (Morin  2002 
for  coronal  and  velar  softening,  Aske  1990  and  Face  2003  for  stress  rules, 
Barkanyi  2002  and  Alvord  2003  for  quantity  sensitivity,  Bybee  &  Pardo  1981  for 
diphthongization,  Pensado  1997  for  nasal  and  lateral  depalatahzation,  Eddington 
2001  for  epenthesis,  and  others).  These  cases  highlight  the  necessity  of  pursuing 


explanation  for  why  stress  does  not  exist  leftward  of  a  heavy  penultimate  syllable.  That  is  to  say,  quantity 
sensitivity  may  (attempt  to)  explain  the  heavy  penult  condition,  but  it  is  not  itself  the  heavy  jjenult 
condition.  We  take  the  heavy  penult  condition  as  the  apparent  restriction  on  stress  leftward  of  a  heavy 
penultimate  syllable,  regardless  of  what  explanation  (quantity  sensitivity  or  otherwise)  may  be  given  for  its 
existence. 


Face  &  Alvord:  Descriptive  Adequacy  vs.  Psychological  Reality     3 

not  only  descriptive  adequacy  in  formulating  phonological  statements,  but  in 
assuring  that  these  statements  reflect  psychological  reality.  As  Hualde  (2000:175) 
puts  it. 

Our  task,  thus,  is  to  discover  which  generalizations  have  reality  for  the 
speakers  of  a  language,  as  reflected  by  their  linguistic  behavior,  without 
being  misled  by  preconceived  notions  of  simplicity. 

In  the  current  paper,  then,  the  task  is  to  determine  whether  the  heavy  penult 
condition  and  the  three-syllable  window  condition  are  psychologically  real  in 
addition  to  being  descriptively  adequate,  or  whether  they  are  descriptively 
adequate  but  lack  reality  for  speakers  of  Spanish.  In  order  for  these  two  conditions 
to  be  considered  psychologically  real,  they  must  not  only  describe  the  data 
accurately,  which  they  clearly  do,  but  they  must  be  shown  to  serve  as  constraints 
prohibiting  words  that  violate  them. 

The  current  paper  presents  the  results  of  a  perception  experiment  testing  the 
psychological  reality  of  the  heavy  penult  condition  and  the  three-syllable  window 
condition  in  Spanish.  Previous  research  on  the  heavy  penult  condition  and  the 
three-syllable  window  condition  is  discussed  in  Section  2.  Section  3  presents 
experimental  methodology.  The  results  are  presented  and  discussed  in  Section  4. 
And  finally.  Section  5  contains  the  conclusions  drawn  from  the  present  study. 

2.       Previous  research 

2.1.    Heavy  penult  condition 

Attempts  to  explain  the  synchronic  processes  that  native  Spanish  speakers  use  to 
assign  stress  to  words  have  sometimes  used  diachronic  evidence  gleaned  from  the 
Spanish  language's  development  from  Latin  (e.g.,  Saltarelli  1997).  The  major 
stress-related  phenomenon  that  has  been  taken  from  Latin  and  applied  to  Spanish 
is  quantity  sensitivity,  which  its  proponents  use  to  explain  the  lack  of  words 
violating  the  heavy  penult  condition. 

Quantity  sensitivity  is  a  term  used  to  describe  the  stress  patterns  in  languages 
whose  syllable  structure,  particularly  the  phonological  "weight"  of  the  syllable, 
directly  affects  how  stress  is  assigned.  Stress  assignment  in  Spanish  has 
traditionally  been  traced  to  the  classical  accentuation  system  of  Latin,  which  has 
been  one  of  the  basic  examples  of  quantity  sensitive  languages.  Latin  accentuation 
has  been  accepted  to  be  entirely  predictable.  The  rule  for  Latin  stress,  in  words 
with  at  least  three  syllables,  calls  for  stress  on  the  penultimate  syllable  if  it  is 
heavy,  and  on  the  antepenultimate  syllable  if  the  penultimate  syllable  is  light.  A 
syllable's  weight  depends  on  the  phonetic  makeup  of  its  rime.  Latin  syllables  are 
heavy  if  they  contain  either  a  long  vowel  or  a  coda  consonant;  the  rime  of  a  light 
syllable  contains  only  a  short  vowel.  The  Latin  stress  rule  indicates  that  a  heavy 
penultimate  syllable  will  "attract"  stress,  preventing  it  from  falling  on  the 
antepenultimate  syllable.  Quantity  sensitivity  is  just  that:  stress  is  sensitive  to 
syllable  weight,  and  therefore  a  heavy  syllable  will  attract  stress. 


4  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

The  many  attempts  in  generative  phonology  to  formalize  stress  placement  in 
Spanish  non-verbs  have  disagreed  on  whether  quantity  sensitivity  actually  plays  a 
role  in  the  synchronic  process.  In  one  of  the  most  notable  works  on  Spanish  stress, 
Harris  (1983)  uses  quantity  sensitivity  as  one  of  the  conditions  for  his  stress 
assignment  algorithm,  as  he  does  in  later  work  as  well  (Harris  1992).  He  notes 
that,  as  in  Latin,  no  Spanish  words  with  antepenultimate  stress  have  a  heavy  penult 
(e.g.,  *  'CVC.CVC.CV),  citing  the  unacceptability  of  nonce  words  such  as 
*teIefosno  and  *dtasca.  Roca  (1990),  on  the  other  hand,  rejects  Spanish  quantity 
sensitivity,  as  did  Larramendi  (1729)  more  than  two  centuries  earlier,  and 
proposes  an  alternate  analysis  to  explain  the  lack  of  words  violating  the  heavy 
penult  condition.  He  argues  that  the  existence  of  loan  words  with  heavy 
penultimate  syllables  and  antepenultimate  stress  (e.g.,  Washington,  Manchester, 
remington  'type  of  rifle')  contradicts  the  presence  of  quantity  sensitivity  in 
Spanish.  He  argues  that  Spanish  speakers  who  produce  these  loan  words  with  the 
foreign  stress  pattern  have  no  knowledge  of  the  source  language.  Anecdotally,  it 
has  been  noted,  however,  that  native  Spanish  speakers  with  extensive  contact  with 
English  can  change  the  stress  patterns  of  these  loan  words  to  fit  a  more  Spanish- 
like pronunciation  (e.g.,  Washington,  Manchester)  (Niiiiez  Cedeno,  personal 
communication). 

In  a  view  somewhere  in  between  those  of  Harris  (1983,  1992)  and  Roca 
(1990,  1999),  Lipski  (1997)  claims  that  it  is  possible  that  Spanish  is  losing  its 
quantity  sensitivity  and  that  in  the  future  it  may  become  completely  quantity 
insensitive.  He  points  out  the  importance  of  one  difference  between  Latin  and 
Spanish:  Spanish  has  no  distinction  between  long  and  short  vowels  or  between 
geminate  and  non-geminate  consonants.  In  its  evolution  from  Latin,  Spanish  lost 
the  distinction  of  vowel  and  consonant  length.  The  fact  that  Spanish  does  not 
distinguish  between  short  and  long  vowels  or  consonants  'inherently  weakens  the 
system  of  quantity  sensitivity'  (Lipski  1997:577). 

More  recently  a  different  approach  in  the  attempt  to  find  evidence  for  or 
against  the  existence  of  quantity  sensitivity  in  Spanish  has  emerged.  A  variety  of 
experimental  studies  have  examined  the  role  of  quantity  sensitivity  in  the 
assignment  of  Spanish  stress.  Face  (2000,  2004a)  performed  perception 
experiments  on  Spanish  stress  placement.  Both  studies  were  performed  using 
synthesized  nonce  words  where  the  acoustic  correlates  to  stress  were  neutralized. 
In  the  first  study.  Face  (2000:8)  found  that  'syllable  weight  has  a  very  real 
cognitive  effect:  A  heavy  syllable  is  far  more  likely  to  be  perceived  as  stressed. . . 
than  is  a  light  syllable'.  It  was  found  later,  however,  that  the  nonce  words  used  in 
this  first  study  were  not  completely  neutralized  and  in  fact  contained  durational 
cues  to  stress.  The  duration  of  vowels,  but  not  of  syllables,  was  neutralized,  and 
therefore  the  coda  consonant  of  heavy  syllables  added  duration  in  addition  to 
phonological  weight.  After  correcting  this  'error  of  experimental  design  (Face 
2004a)  by  neutrahzing  syllable  durations  as  opposed  to  vowel  durations,  the 


Face  &  Alvord:  Descriptive  Adequacy  vs.  Psychological  Reality     5 

previous  study  was  replicated  with  completely  neutralized  nonce  words.^  Results 
from  this  study  were  found  to  contradict  the  previous  findings.  Face  (2004) 
concluded  that  Spanish  is  not  quantity  sensitive.  Similar  conclusions  have  been 
reached  by  researchers  using  different  types  of  experimental  data. 

Barkanyi  (2002)  used  a  paper  and  pencil  test  with  nonce  words  in  which  she 
asked  informants  to  mark  orthographically  where  they  would  stress  each  nonce 
word.  The  unmarked  stress  pattern  (i.e.,  stress  the  last  syllable  if  the  word  ends  in 
a  consonant  or  the  penultimate  syllable  if  the  word  ends  in  a  vowel)  emerged  the 
most  often  in  her  data,  as  expected.  However,  a  considerable  number  of  words 
with  heavy  penultimate  syllables  were  assigned  antepenultimate  stress,  and  this 
number  was  nearly  as  high  as  in  cases  with  a  light  penultimate  syllable.  This  led 
Barkanyi  to  conclude  that  quantity  sensitivity  is  not  an  active  process  for  native 
Spanish  speakers  and  that  stress  is  most  likely  assigned  using  analogy  to  known 
words  in  the  lexicon,  which  in  this  case  are  borrowing  such  as  badminton 
'badminton'  and  remington  'type  of  rifle' . 

In  a  similar  study,  Alvord  (2003)  presented  Spanish-speaking  subjects  with  a 
written  Ust  of  nonce  words  with  orthographic  accents  written  in.  Participants  were 
asked  to  judge  each  word  as  either  possible  or  impossible  in  Spanish.  Nonce  words 
that  were  presented  with  antepenultimate  stress  and  heavy  penults  (e.g.,  tampunlo) 
were  overwhelmingly  accepted  as  possible  Spanish  words  (94%).  Alvord  (2003) 
not  only  concluded  that  Spanish  is  not  quantity  sensitive,  but  also  questioned 
whether  the  oft-cited  restrictions  on  antepenultimate  stress  in  words  with  a  heavy 
penultimate  syllable  might  not  be  productive  restrictions  at  all,  but  rather  the 
results  of  historical  developments,  as  also  argued  in  Roca  (1990).  While  the 
quantity  sensitivity  explanation  for  the  heavy  penult  condition  has  been  a  matter  of 
debate,  Alvord  goes  beyond  rejecting  quantity  sensitivity  as  the  reason  for  the 
heavy  penult  condition,  as  he  questions  whether  the  heavy  penult  condition  is  even 
a  restriction  on  Spanish  stress  placement  at  all.  The  conclusion  that  there  is  no 
restriction  on  having  stress  on  the  antepenultimate  syllable  when  the  penultimate 
syllable  is  heavy  is  of  significant  interest,  and  merits  further  investigation  using 
other  experimental  designs. 

2.2.    Three-syllable  window  condition 

There  is  not  much  to  report  by  way  of  research  into  the  three-syllable  window 
condition.  The  primary  evidence  cited  for  the  existence  of  this  condition  in 
Spanish  is  the  simple  absence  of  words  that  have  stress  in  any  syllable  other  than 
the  last  three.  The  most  interesting  evidence  that  can  be  found  is  the  pluralization 
of  singular  words  with  antepenultimate  stress  that  also  end  in  a  consonant  (Hualde 
2000,  Morales-Front  1999).  Generally,  when  singular  words  in  Spanish  are 
pluralized,  the  same  syllable  is  stressed  in  the  plural  as  in  the  singular.  Examples 
of  this  can  be  seen  in  (2a).  However,   in  cases  where  the  singular  has 


^  Jose  Ignacio  Hualde  pointed  out  that  neither  neutralizing  vowel  duration  or  syllable  duration  is  truly 
representative  of  natural  speech,  as  in  heavy  syllables  the  rime  is  longer  than  in  light  syllables,  though  the 
vowel  itself  is  shorter.  For  the  purpose  of  controlling  factors  in  the  perception  studies,  however,  this  type  of 
neutralization  is  necessary. 


6  Studes  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

antepenultimate  stress  and  a  final  consonant,  stress  shifts  so  that  it  remains  within 
the  three-syllable  window,  although  the  location  of  stress  in  the  plural  varies. 
Examples  of  this  shift  can  be  seen  in  (2b). 

(2)     a.       pera-peras  'pear-pears' 

tabu-tabues  'taboo-taboos' 
camion-camiones  'truck-trucks' 

b.       regimen-regimenes  'diet-diets' 

omicron-omicrones  '  omicron-omicrons ' 

The  three-syllable  window  condition  is  clearly  descriptively  true  and  its 
productivity  has  never  been  questioned.  However,  since  descriptively  adequate 
statements  about  language  do  not  always  represent  psychologically  real 
restrictions  on  the  language,  and  especially  in  light  of  Alvord's  (2003)  claim  that 
the  heavy  penult  condition  may  not  be  psychologically  real,  all  apparent 
restrictions  on  Spanish  stress  placement,  including  the  three-syllable  window 
condition  need  to  be  re-examined. 

3.  Methodology 

The  experiment  carried  out  for  the  present  study  was  designed  to  further  test  the 
claim  in  Alvord  (2003)  that  the  heavy  penult  condition  is  not  a  psychologically 
real  and  productive  restriction  on  Spanish  stress,  and  also  to  experimentally  test 
whether  the  three-syllable  window  condition  is  a  psychologically  real  and 
productive  restriction  or  the  artifact  of  other  factors.  The  experiment  seeks  to 
investigate  these  issues  through  a  perception  test  in  which  subjects  were  asked  to 
judge  the  acceptability  of  synthesized  nonce  words. 

In  order  to  test  the  psychological  reality  of  these  two  descriptively  adequate 
potential  restrictions  on  Spanish  stress  placement,  a  perception  test  was  designed 
that  looks  closely  at  both  of  the  environments  described  above.  Since  the  evidence 
cited  for  the  heavy  penult  condition  is  the  absence  of  Spanish  words  with 
antepenultimate  stress  and  a  heavy  penultimate  syllable,  nonce  words  with  these 
characteristics  (i.e.,  'CVC.CVC.CV)  were  included.  Similarly,  the  evidence  for  the 
existence  of  the  three-syllable  window  condition  is  the  absence  of  Spanish  words 
with  stress  earlier  in  the  word  than  the  final  three  syllables,  and  therefore  nonce 
words  with  stress  on  the  fourth-to-last  syllable  (i.e.,  'CV.CV.CV.CV)  were 
included  in  the  perception  test. 

In  all,  100  nonce  words  were  created  (see  Appendix)  and  synthesized  using 
the  MBROLI  speech  synthesizer.  Since  stress  is  the  main  focus  of  the  study, 
special  care  was  taken  in  the  synthesis  process  to  encode  stress.  The  fundamental 
frequency  (FO)  and  the  duration  of  segments  were  manipulated  in  order  to 
synthesize  the  acoustic  presence  of  stress.  While  the  MBROLI  speech  synthesizer 
allows  for  manipulation  of  the  FO  and  duration,  it  does  not  allow  for  the 
manipulation  of  intensity.  However,  experimental  studies  investigating  the 
acoustic  correlates  of  stress  from  both  the  production  and  perception  perspectives 
have  found  that  FO  and  duration  are  by  far  the  most  important  acoustic  correlates 


Face  &  Alvord:  Descriptive  Adequacy  vs.  Psychological  Reality     7 

of  Spanish  stress,  with  intensity  having  a  minimal  role,  if  any,  in  communicating 
Spanish  stress  (e.g.,  Enriquez,  Casado,  &  Santos  1989;  Llisterri  et  al.  2003,  2004; 
Quilis  1971).^ 

All  words  were  designed  not  only  to  fit  the  target  structures  for  syllables  and 
stress,  but  also  to  follow  Hochberg's  (1988)  guidelines  for  segmental  composition 
to  avoid  close  similarity  to  real  Spanish  words.  This  was  done  to  avoid  the 
existence  of  a  similar  real  word  influencing  the  acceptability  judgments  on  the 
experimental  words  through  the  association  of  existing  words  and  their  stress 
patterns  (cf.  Face  2004a).  In  order  to  ensure  that  the  nonce  words  were  indeed  not 
too  similar  to  existing  words,  the  list  of  nonce  words  was  checked  by  a  native 
Spanish  speaker,  and  any  words  that  were  found  to  resemble  actual  words  too 
closely  were  subsequently  changed. 

The  100  synthesized  nonce  words  consist  of  four  different  groups  of  words, 
with  each  group  having  a  different  function  in  the  experiment.  There  were  two 
experimental  groups  and  two  control  groups.  The  first  experimental  group  (N=20), 
was  created  in  order  to  test  the  psychological  reality  of  the  heavy  penult  condition. 
This  group  consists  of  nonce  words,  following  the  phonotactic  patterns  of  Spanish, 
with  heavy  penultimate  syllables  which  were  synthesized  to  carry  antepenultimate 
stress  (e.g.,  gdntirpo).  As  explained  above,  this  type  of  word  has  been  claimed  not 
to  be  possible  in  Spanish,  existing  only  in  a  few  toponyms  and  borrowings.  This 
claim,  however,  has  been  brought  into  question  by  Alvord  (2003).  Acceptance  of 
the  words  in  the  heavy  penult  group  would  support  Alvord' s  claim  that  the  heavy 
penult  condition  is  not  a  psychologically  real  restriction  on  Spanish  stress 
placement.  Rejection  of  these  nonce  words  would  support  the  traditional  view  that 
there  is  a  restriction  on  this  type  of  word  in  Spanish. 

The  second  experimental  group  (N=20)  was  designed  to  test  the 
psychological  reality  of  the  three-syllable  window  condition.  This  group  consists 
of  nonce  words  with  four  syllables  and  stress  falling  on  the  first  (e.g.,  topuneta).  In 
order  to  test  the  psychological  reality  of  the  three-syllable  window  condition,  it  is 
important  that  the  nonce  words  be  analyzable  only  as  whole  lexical  words  and  not 
combinations  of  a  lexical  word  plus  enclitic  pronoun,  since  at  least 
orthographically  these  cases  appear  to  violate  the  three-syllable  window  condition. 
Because  of  this,  care  was  taken  in  designing  the  nonce  words  so  that  the  last 
syllable  would  not  be  interpretable  as  a  clitic  pronoun  (e.g.,  te,  me,  se,  lo,  la,  le). 
Acceptance  of  the  nonce  words  in  the  three-syllable  window  group  would  call  into 
question  the  psychological  reality  of  the  three-syllable  window  condition  as  a 
productive  restriction  on  Spanish  stress  placement.  The  rejection  of  these  nonce 
words  would  indicate  that  the  lack  of  words  violating  the  three-syllable  window 
condition  in  Spanish  is  indeed  due  to  this  condition  being  a  productive  restriction 
on  stress  placement. 


'This  same  view  had  been  maintained  for  Enghsh,  but  Beckman  (1986)  shows  that  intensity  actually 
provides  a  strong  cue  for  stress  when  correctly  evaluated  (i.e.,  when  integrated  with  duration). 


8  STUDffiS  IN  THE  LINGUISTIC  SCIENCES  32:2  (FALL  2002) 

The  other  two  groups  of  nonce  words  were  included  as  a  measure  of  control. 
The  first  control  group  (N=30)  consisting  of  only  obviously  possible  Spanish 
words,  with  each  containing  phonotactic  and  stress  patterns  that  actually  exist  in 
real  Spanish  words.  The  second  control  group  (N=30),  on  the  other  hand, 
contained  nonce  words  that  were  designed  to  be  obviously  impossible  Spanish 
words,  going  against  Spanish  phonotactic  patterns,  generally  by  containing 
consonant  clusters  disallowed  in  Spanish.  These  two  groups  of  words  served  as  a 
measure  of  control  to  ensure  that  the  subjects  could  differentiate  between  possible 
and  impossible  Spanish  words,  since  this  abihty  is  essential  if  the  results  for  the 
experimental  groups  are  to  be  meaningful.  At  least  80%  accuracy  on  the  control 
groups  was  required  for  the  data  of  potential  subjects  to  be  counted  in  the  analysis 
of  the  experimental  groups. 

The  100  nonce  words  were  randomized  and  recorded  as  individual  .CD A 
files  onto  a  compact  disc  with  3  seconds  of  silence  between  each  word.  The  CD 
was  played  on  a  Panasonic  SL-S262  portable  CD  player  and  listened  to  via 
Panasonic  stereo  headphones.  Before  beginning  the  official  test,  a  practice  set  of 
five  words  was  presented  to  the  subjects  so  that  they  could  adjust  their  ear  to  the 
synthesized  voice  and  the  rhythm  of  the  presentation.  Subjects  were  allowed  to 
listen  to  the  practice  session  as  many  times  as  they  wanted  to  in  order  to  feel 
comfortable  in  completing  the  task.  After  the  subjects  listened  to  the  practice 
section,  the  test  words  were  presented,  and  no  repetition  was  permitted.  The 
subjects  recorded  their  judgments  on  a  sheet  of  paper  numbered  from  1  to  100 
with  the  words  si  and  no  written  next  to  each  number.  For  each  word  heard, 
subjects  were  asked  to  circle  the  appropriate  answer  according  to  whether  or  not 
the  word  they  heard  was  a  possible  Spanish  word.  The  notion  of  "possible  Spanish 
word"  was  explained  to  subjects  by  telling  them  that  while  none  of  the  words  they 
would  hear  were  real  Spanish  words,  the  question  they  needed  to  answer  was 
whether  each  word  could  be  a  Spanish  word  if  a  new  word  was  needed  for  a 
concept  not  communicated  by  any  existing  Spanish  word. 

Since  any  claim  in  the  present  study  about  the  psychological  reality  of  the 
heavy  penult  condition  and  the  three-syllable  window  condition  as  restrictions  on 
Spanish  stress  placement  hinges  on  the  acceptance  or  rejection  of  nonce  words 
based  on  their  acoustically  marked  stress,  it  is  imperative  that  the  subjects  be  able 
to  identify  the  acoustically  stressed  syllable  in  these  synthesized  nonce  words.  As 
an  additional  measure  of  control,  a  post-test  was  administered  to  the  subjects  in 
which  20  of  the  synthesized  words  from  the  "possible"  group  were  re-presented 
and  the  subjects  were  asked  to  indicate  which  syllable  they  heard  as  stressed. 
Subjects  recorded  their  answers  on  a  sheet  of  paper  numbered  from  1  to  20,  with 
each  number  followed  by  the  numbers  1,  2,  and  3.  Subjects  circled  the  number  of 
the  syllable  perceived  to  be  stressed.  This  post-test  was  administered  immediately 
following  the  completion  of  the  main  experiment,  and  this  ordering  was  chosen  to 
avoid  directing  the  subjects'  attention  to  stress  as  the  main  interest  of  the  study 
before  completing  the  acceptability  judgments.  Subjects  were  required  to  perceive 
stress  with  at  least  75%  accuracy  to  have  their  results  included  in  the  study.  The 


Face  &  Alvord:  Descriptive  Adequacy  vs.  Psychological  Reality     9 

average  score  on  the  post-test  was  85%,  indicating  that  the  subjects  were  very 
accurate  in  identifying  the  acoustically  stressed  syllable  of  the  synthesized  nonce 
words. 

Subjects  were  10  native  speakers  of  Spanish  attending  graduate  school  in  the 
United  States  who  were  naive  with  respect  to  the  purposes  of  the  study.  All  grew 
up  monolingual  speakers  of  Spanish  and  none  had  lived  in  the  U.S.  prior  to 
attending  graduate  school.  While  the  subjects  speak  different  varieties  of  Spanish, 
this  mixture  of  Spanish  dialects  does  not  pose  any  problem  for  the  present  study 
since  the  apparent  restrictions  on  stress  patterns  being  tested  are  consistent  across 
Spanish. 


4.  Results  and  discussion 

Table  1  shows  the  results  of  the  perception  test.  Nonce  words  in  the  two  control 
groups  were  accepted  or  rejected  as  would  be  expected.  Nonce  words  in  the 
"possible"  group  were  accepted  at  a  rate  of  81%  and  the  words  from  the 
"impossible"  group  were  rejected  at  a  rate  of  89%.  More  interesting  are  the  results 
for  the  two  experimental  groups.  Subjects  accepted  nonce  words  in  the  heavy 
penult  group  at  a  rate  of  67%  (133  of  200)  and  those  in  the  three-syllable  window 
group  at  a  rate  of  62%  ( 1 23  of  200). 

Table  1.  Acceptabihty  judgments  by  nonce  word  group 


Yes 

No 

# 

% 

# 

% 

Totals 

Heavy  Penult 

133 

67% 

67 

34% 

200 

3  Syllable 
Window 

123 

62% 

77 

39% 

200 

Possible 

244 

81% 

56 

19% 

300 

Impossible 

32 

11% 

268 

89% 

300 

Totals 

532 

53% 

468 

47% 

1000 

The  result  in  Table  1,  as  well  as  in  Figure  1,  that  stands  out  is  that  both 
experimental  groups  were  accepted  more  often  than  they  were  rejected,  and  far 
more  often  than  the  impossible  group.  While  the  experimental  groups  were  not 
accepted  as  often  as  the  possible  group,  it  is  clear  that  their  rate  of  acceptance  is 
more  similar  to  that  of  the  possible  group  than  to  that  of  the  impossible  group. 
Overall,  nonce  words  in  both  experimental  groups  are  accepted  as  possible 
Spanish  words. 


10 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 


100% 
80% 
60% 
40% 
20% 
0% 


■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

67% 

■ 

81% 

H 

I 

62% 

1 

■  Ho 
DYes 


Heavy 
Penult 


3  Syllable        Possible 
Window 


Impossible 


Figure  1.  Acceptability  judgments  by  nonce  word  group. 

In  order  to  see  how  the  acceptabiUty  of  each  group  compares  to  the  other 
groups,  a  chi-squared  analysis  was  performed.  A  chi-squared  test  comparing  all 
four  groups  shows  that  the  distribution  of  acceptance  across  groups  is  statistically 
significant  (p<0.0001).  This  result  is  to  be  expected,  however,  given  the  presence 
of  the  control  groups,  where  the  impossible  group  was  required  to  be  rejected  and 
the  possible  group  was  required  to  be  accepted.  In  order  to  see  if  the  acceptability 
of  the  experimental  groups  differs  significantly  from  the  control  groups, 
subsequent  chi-squared  analyses  are  needed.  These  analyses  indicate  that  the  rate 
of  acceptance  of  each  of  the  two  experimental  groups  differs  significantly  from 
that  of  each  of  the  two  control  groups  (p<0.001).  Furthermore,  another  chi-squared 
analysis  indicates  that  the  two  experimental  groups  do  not  differ  significantly  from 
each  other  in  their  rate  of  acceptance  (p=0.27).  We  can  interpret  these  results  as 
meaning  that  the  words  in  the  heavy  penult  and  three-syllable  window  groups 
were  placed  into  their  own  group  by  subjects  in  terms  of  rate  of  acceptability.  We 
end  up,  thus,  with  three  groups:  1)  the  possible  group,  accepted  as  possible 
Spanish  words  at  a  very  high  rate,  2)  the  experimental  groups,  accepted  more  often 
than  not,  but  less  than  the  possible  group,  and  3)  the  impossible  group,  rarely 
accepted  as  possible  Spanish  words. 

The  overall  acceptability  of  the  heavy  penult  group  lends  support  to  recent 
experimental  studies  that  claim  that  Spanish  is  not  quantity  sensitive  (Alvord 
2003,  Barkanyi  2002,  Face  2004a).  In  addition,  it  provides  support  for  Alvord's 
claim  that  the  heavy  penult  condition  is  not  a  psychologically  real  and  productive 
restriction  on  Spanish  stress  placement. 

The  acceptability  of  the  three-syllable  window  group  is  perhaps  more 
interesting.  The  descriptive  adequacy  of  the  three-syllable  window  condition 
cannot  be  refuted,  as  Spanish  has  no  words  with  stress  outside  of  the  final  three 
syllables  of  the  word.  The  results  of  the  present  study,  however,  bring  into 
question  the  psychological  reality  of  the  three-syllable  window  condition  as  a  true 
restriction  on  Spanish  stress  placement.  Hualde  (2000:175),  while  arguing  for  an 
analogical  model  for  Spanish  stress,  explains  that  Spanish  speakers  make 


Face  &  Alvord:  Descriptive  Adequacy  vs.  Psychological  Reality   ll 

generalizations  based  on  patterns  in  the  lexicon.  He  uses  the  three-syllable  window 
condition  as  an  example,  stating  that  'Spanish-speakers  know  that  the  plural  of 
regimen,  omicron,  Jupiter,  whatever  it  is,  cannot  be  regimenes,  omicrones, 
Jupiteres\  This  generalization  on  the  part  of  Spanish  speakers  makes  perfect  sense 
given  the  categorical  presence  of  stress  on  only  the  last  three  syllables  of  Spanish 
words.  Given  the  seeming  strength  of  this  generalization,  it  may  seem  odd  that 
words  violating  the  three-syllable  window  condition  would  be  judged  to  be 
possible  Spanish  words.  If  this  condition  were  a  psychologically  real  restriction  on 
Spanish  stress  placement,  one  would  expect  the  words  in  violation  to  be  rejected  at 
a  rate  similar  to  the  high  rate  of  rejection  of  the  impossible  group.  Clearly, 
however,  this  is  not  the  case. 

While  the  nonce  words  of  the  experimental  groups  were  not  rejected  at  a  rate 
similar  to  the  nonce  words  of  the  impossible  group,  and  while  they  were  accepted 
overall,  the  question  of  why  they  were  not  accepted  as  often  as  the  nonce  words  of 
the  possible  group  must  be  addressed.  This  is  where  the  lack  of  existing  words 
having  these  patterns  comes  into  play.  While  the  nonce  words  of  the  experimental 
groups  are  accepted  overall,  numerous  recent  studies  have  shown  that  an 
individual's  language  experience  and  the  frequency  of  occurrence  of  words  and 
patterns  is  an  important  part  of  their  competence  (e.g.,  Bybee  2001,  Bybee  & 
Hopper  2001,  and  references  therein).  The  fact  that  Spanish  speakers  have  never 
heard  words  with  these  patterns  makes  them  seem  less  "Spanish-like"  than  words 
that  follow  familiar  patterns.  Therefore,  while  they  are  not  completely  rejected  in 
the  way  that  the  words  in  the  impossible  group  are,  the  relative  degree  of 
unfamiliarity  of  their  stress  patterns  in  comparison  with  those  of  the  nonce  words 
in  the  possible  group  results  in  a  somewhat  lower  rate  of  acceptance. 

One  possible  explanation  is  that  segmental  factors  are  more  salient  to 
listeners  than  is  stress  placement  in  determining  whether  a  nonce  word  is  a 
possible  Spanish  word.  If  this  explanation  is  accurate,  the  nonce  words  violating 
the  heavy  penult  condition  and  the  three-syllable  window  condition  may  have 
sounded  "more  Spanish-like"  than  the  nonce  words  whose  segmental 
combinations  made  them  unacceptable  (i.e.,  the  impossible  group).  While  this 
explanation  is  possible,  the  huge  difference  in  how  the  two  experimental  groups 
and  the  impossible  group  were  accepted,  along  with  the  overall  acceptance  of  the 
experimental  group,  makes  this  explanation  seem  unlikely. 

The  other  possibility,  indicated  by  the  current  results,  is  that  the  heavy  penult 
condition  and  the  three-syllable  window  condition,  while  descriptively  adequate, 
are  not  psychologically  real  restrictions  on  Spanish  stress  placement.  The  concept 
of  descriptive  truths  not  necessarily  corresponding  with  psychological  reality  is 
not  a  new  one.  In  fact,  much  recent  evidence  that  has  been  brought  forth  in  favor 
of  such  an  idea  has  come  from  experimental  work  on  Spanish  stress  (e.g.,  Aske 
1990;  Eddington  2000,  2004;  Face  2003,  2004a;  Hualde  2000;  Waltermire  2004). 


12  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

5.  Conclusion 

The  present  study  has  presented  results  from  a  perception  experiment  examining 
the  psychological  reality  of  two  apparent  restrictions  on  Spanish  stress  placement. 
The  first  apparent  restriction  examined  is  the  apparent  prohibition  against  words 
with  antepenultimate  stress  that  have  a  heavy  penultimate  syllable  (i.e.,  the  heavy 
penult  condition).  The  results  of  the  experiment  showed  that  nonce  words  in 
violation  of  this  restriction  were  accepted  overall  as  possible  Spanish  words.  This 
finding  lends  support  to  the  growing  number  of  experimental  studies  that  have 
found  that  Spanish  is  not  quantity  sensitive  (e.g.,  Alvord  2003,  Barkanyi  2002, 
Face  2004),  presenting  another  type  of  evidence,  but  also  supports  the  suggestion 
in  Alvord  (2003)  that  the  heavy  penult  condition  is  not  a  psychologically  real 
restriction  on  Spanish  stress  placement. 

The  second  apparent  restriction  examined  is  the  apparent  prohibition  against 
words  with  stress  outside  of  the  final  three  syllables  (i.e.,  the  three-syllable 
window  condition).  The  overall  acceptance  of  nonce  words  stressed  on  the  fourth 
to  last  syllable  calls  into  question  the  psychological  reality  of  the  three-syllable 
window  restriction  on  Spanish  stress.  As  this  is  the  first  experimental  study  to 
investigate  the  three-syllable  window  condition,  further  examination  is  certainly 
required  before  sweeping  conclusions  can  be  drawn.  However,  the  results  of  the 
present  study  indicate  that  the  three-syllable  window  condition  is  not  a 
psychologically  real  restriction  on  Spanish  stress  placement. 

In  the  cases  of  the  heavy  penult  condition  and  the  three-syllable  window 
condition  in  Spanish,  clearly  it  is  true  that,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  toponyms 
and  borrowings  in  the  case  of  the  heavy  penult  condition,  the  Spanish  lexicon 
consists  only  of  words  that  follow  these  conditions.  There  is  no  question,  then,  that 
they  are  descriptively  adequate  generalizations  about  stress  placement  in  Spanish. 
But  it  is  one  thing  to  formulate  a  descriptive  generalization  over  the  lexicon  and 
another  thing  altogether  to  say  that  this  descriptive  generalization  functions  as  a 
constraint  disallowing  words  that  violate  it.  If  a  descriptive  generalization  about 
the  lexicon  were  indeed  shown  to  be  used  by  speakers  of  the  language  as  a 
constraint  prohibiting  words  that  violate  the  generalization,  then  it  would  be 
possible  to  say  that  there  exists  a  psychologically  real  restriction  on  the  language. 
In  the  case  of  the  two  apparent  restrictions  on  Spanish  stress  considered  in  this 
paper,  however,  this  is  clearly  not  the  case.  The  heavy  penult  condition  and  the 
three-syllable  window  condition  are  descriptive  generalizations  over  the  Spanish 
lexicon,  but  they  do  not  serve  as  a  constraint  that  prohibits  words  that  go  against 
these  generalizations,  and  therefore  they  cannot  be  considered  psychologically  real 
restrictions  on  Spanish  stress  placement. 

An  issue  deserving  of  comment  is  the  fact  that  there  are  exceptions  to  the 
heavy  penult  condition  in  borrowings  and  foreign  names  (e.g.,  Fromista, 
Manchester,  remington  'type  of  rifle'),  but  no  exceptions  to  the  three-syllable 
window  condition,  despite  the  fact  that  there  are  foreign  place  names  such  as 
Slovak  Bratislava,  which  when  pronounced  in  Spanish  becomes  Bratislava.  This 
is  especially  interesting  since  in  the  present  study  no  significant  difference  was 


Face  &  Alvord:  Descriptive  Adequacy  vs.  Psychological  Reality   13 

found  between  the  status  of  the  nonce  words  violating  the  heavy  penult  condition 
and  those  violating  the  three-syllable  window  condition.  Unfortunately,  we  have 
no  great  insight  into  why  exceptions  exist  to  only  the  heavy  penult  condition.  One 
possibility  mentioned  by  an  anonymous  reviewer  is  that  Spanish  has  been  in 
contact  with  Germanic  languages,  which  are  the  source  of  the  exceptions 
mentioned  above,  but  not  with  languages,  such  as  Hungarian,  Finnish  or  Czech, 
where  stress  four  or  more  syllables  from  the  end  is  possible.  There  are,  for 
example,  very  few  Slovak-Spanish  bilinguals  who  could  serve  as  a  model  for  the 
correct  pronunciation  of  Bratislava.  This  is  a  possible  explanation  for  the 
distribution  of  exceptions  to  the  two  conditions  in  question,  but  leaves  other 
questions  unanswered.  For  example,  Spanish  speakers  have  a  much  more  difficult 
time  forming  the  plural  of  Jupiter  'Jupiter'  than  they  do  forming  the  plural  of 
Saturno  'Saturn'.  Stress  is  almost  always  on  the  same  syllable  in  plurals  as  in 
singulars,  and  this  poses  no  problem  in  forming  Satumos  'Satums'.  However  in 
forming  the  plural  of  Jupiter,  an  additional  syllable  must  be  added,  resulting  in  the 
segmental  sequence  Jupiteres.  In  this  case,  if  stress  is  left  in  the  same  place  as  in 
singulars,  it  falls  on  the  fourth  syllable  from  the  end.  Yet  Spanish  speakers  do  not 
produce  stress  on  that  syllable,  but  generally  struggle  in  deciding  between 
stressing  the  penultimate  or  the  antepenultimate  syllable.  The  likely  explanation 
for  this  difficulty  is  the  lack  of  model  singular-plural  pairs,  which  exist  (e.g., 
regimen- re gimenes  'diet-diets')  but  are  extremely  rare.  Of  course,  there  are  no 
examples  of  words  with  stress  outside  of  the  final  three  syllables  of  the  word,  and 
this  may  make  speakers  even  more  likely  to  shift  stress  in  the  plural  of  Jupiter, 
even  though  the  results  of  the  present  study  indicate  that  there  is  no  real  restriction 
against  a  word  such  as  Jupiteres.  But  while  the  explanation  of  contact  with 
Germanic  languages  and  not  with  languages  such  as  Hungarian,  Finnish  and 
Czech  may  explain  the  existence  of  exceptions  to  the  heavy  penult  condition  and 
not  the  three-syllable  window  condition,  there  is  no  way  at  this  point  to  determine 
whether  or  not  this  is  the  correct  explanation 

In  addition  to  presenting  specific  results  with  respect  to  the  heavy  penult 
condition  and  the  three-syllable  window  condition  in  Spanish,  the  present  study 
adds  to  the  growing  body  of  research  that  questions  the  connection  between 
descriptive  truths  and  psychological  reality  in  linguistics.  While  many 
descriptively  adequate  statements  are  likely  to  also  represent  psychological  reality 
for  speakers  of  a  language,  the  results  of  the  present  study  emphasize  that  this  is 
not  always  the  case.  Care  must  be  taken  in  linguistic  analysis  to  verify  that 
statements  based  on  descriptive  facts  about  a  language  are  not  over-generalized  to 
represent  the  psychological  reality  of  speakers  of  that  language  without  proper 
empirical  investigation. 


14  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

APPENDIX 

Heavy  Penult  Group: 

ferelpa,  tampunlo,  pinquensa,  candolde,  lardanta,  vintento,  pentoslo,  timpelto, 
dinpuma,  ranlinta,  gantirpo,  zentolpa,  pardungo,  minpurco,  rinlambo,  nodulta, 
lumponto,  zelsimpa,  pompurta,  niimpatro 

Three-syllable  Window  Group: 

gitulopa,  pasirenu,  betranuca,  topuneta,  dafulona,  bilinalis,  volutaso,  nolumoda, 
etrapolo,  ratepano,  lopirena,  liteslope,  onlapenu,  dasecopo,  telucape,  cideroti, 
cafunoli,  cabilato,  napulatra,  miilofane 

Impossible  Group: 

nequiclprta,  skrilzareio,  chticnarp,  snolprt,  ercbatris,  jtcapruts,  datbanct,  zogpinrp, 
chagtjtup,  gkimzin,  txcopne,  llesdtard,  sirrimkbi,  lopsuvkbi,  lopntlist,  renctop, 
awsilnpt,  kpouell,  ivumgtra,  ustgbro,  wioasdpi,  vinctzico,  nresnizcp,  tnvaoi, 
btascat,  dlpacstp,  bcapintrrow,  urrachpza,  spoinbt,  sanstkipt 

Possible  Group: 

tinaro,  quitravo,  tablumo,  nafrafio,  dotene,  estrfnato,  pafiilpa,  modora,  cotrona, 
cubosta,  jarplista,  calpemo,  gilbresa,  mufrismo,  sortrinista,  tuluvan,  licuspa, 
nolema,  lojarra,  distropa,  lotrano,  viteno,  pocudin,  gatrisa,  silzira,  atranda,  ciblaca, 
pulatra,  ponlita,  blisin 


Face  &  Alvord:  Descriptive  Adequacy  vs.  Psychological  Reality    15 

REFERENCES 

kLVORD,  Scott  M.  2003.  The  psychological  unreality  of  quantity  sensitivity  in 

Spanish:  Experimental  evidence.  Southwest  Journal  of  Linguistics  22:2.1-12. 
^SKE,  Jon.  1990.  Disembodied  rules  vs.  patterns  in  the  lexicon:  Testing  the 
j        psychological  reality  of  Spanish  stress  rules.  In:  Hall,  Koenig,  Meacham, 

Reinman  &  Sutton  (eds.),  30-45. 
Jarkanyi,  Zsuzsanna.  2002.  A  fresh  look  at  quantity  sensitivity  in  Spanish. 

Linguistics  40.375-94. 
iECKMAN,  Mary.  1986.  Stress  and  Non-Stress  Accent.  Dordrecht:  Foris. 
3YBEE,  Joan.  2001.  Phonology  and  Language   Use.  Cambridge:  Cambridge 

University  Press. 
3YBEE,  Joan  &  Paul  Hopper  (eds.).  2001.  Frequency  and  the  Emergence  of 

Linguistic  Structure.  Amsterdam:  John  Benjamins. 
Bybee,  Joan  &  Elly  Pardo.  1981.  On  lexical  and  morphological  conditioning  of 

alternations:  A  nonce-probe  experiment  with  Spanish  verbs.  Linguistics 

19.937-68. 
Campos,  Elena  Herburger,  Alfonso  Morales-Front  &  Thomas  J.  Walsh  (eds.). 

Hispanic  Linguistics  at  the  Turn  of  the  Millennium.,  Somerville,  MA: 

Cascadilla  Press. 
Cedeno,  Rafael  Nuiiez  &  Alfonso  Morales-Front  (eds.).  1999.  Fonologia 

Generativa  Contempordnea  de  la  Lengua  Espahola.  Washington,  DC: 

Georgetown  University  Press. 
Eddington,  David.  2000.  Spanish  stress  assignment  within  Analogical  ModeUng 

of  Language.  Language  76.92-109. 
.  2001.  Spanish  epenthesis:  Formal  and  performance  perspectives.  Studies  in 

the  Linguistic  Sciences  31:2.33-53. 
.  2004.  A  computational  approach  to  resolving  certain  issues  in  Spanish  stress 

placement.  In:  Face  (ed.). 
Enriquez,  Emilia  V.,  Celia  Casado  &  Andres  Santos.  1989.  La  percepcion  del 

acento  en  espaiiol.  Lingiiistica  Espahola  Actual  1 1.241-69. 
Face,  Timothy  L.  2000.  The  role  of  syllable  weight  in  the  perception  of  Spanish 

stress.  In:  Campos,  Herburger,  Morales-Front  &  Walsh  (eds.),  1-13. 
.  2003.  Where  is  stress?  Synchronic  and  diachronic  Spanish  evidence.  In 

Kempchinsky  &  Pineros  (eds.),  21-39. 
.  2004a.  Perceiving  what  isn't  there:  Non-acoustic  cues  for  perceiving 

Spanish  stress.  In  Face  (ed.). 
(ed.).  2004b.  Laboratory  Approaches  to  Spanish  Phonology.  Berlin:  Mouton 

de  Gruyter. 
Hale,  Kenneth.  1973.  Deep-surface  canonical  disparities  in  relation  to  analysis 

and  change:  An  Australian  example.  In:  Sebeok  (ed.),  401-58. 
Hall,  Kira,  Jean-Pierre  KOENiG,  Michael  Meacham,  Sondra  Reinman  &  Laurel 

A.  Sutton  (eds.).  1990.  Proceedings  of  the  Sixteenth  Annual  Meeting  of  the 

Berkeley  Linguistics  Society.  Berkeley:  Berkeley  Linguistics  Society. 


16  STUDffiS  IN  THE  LINGUISTIC  SCIENCES  32:2  (FALL  2002) 

Harris,  James  W.  1983.  Syllable  Structure  and  Stress  in  Spanish.  Cambridge, 

MA:  MIT  Press. 
.  1992.  Spanish  Stress:  The  Extrametricality  Issue.  Bloomington,  IN:  Indiana 

University  Linguistics  Club. 
HOCHBERG,  Judith  G.   1988.  Learning  Spanish  stress:  Developmental  and 

theoretical  perspectives.  Language  64.683-706. 
HUALDE,  Jose  Ignacio.  2000.  How  general  are  linguistic  generalizations?  CLS 

36.167-77. 
Kempchinsky,  Paula  &  Carlos  Eduardo  Pineros  (eds.).  2003.  Theory,  Practice, 

and  Acquisition.  Somerville,  MA:  Cascadilla  Press. 
KiPARSKY,  Paul.  1982.  Explanation  in  Phonology.  Dordrecht:  Foris. 
LiPSKi,  John.  1997.  Spanish  stress:  The  interaction  of  moras  and  minimality.  In: 

Martinez-Gil  &  Morales-Front  (eds.),  559-93. 
Llisterri,  Joaquim,  Maria  Machuca,  Carme  DE  la  Mota,  Montserrat  Riera  & 

Antonio  RiOS.  To  appear.  La  percepcion  del  acento  lexico  en  espahol.  In: 

Homenaje  a  Antonio  Quilis.  Universidad  de  ValladoHd,  Consejo  Superior  de 

Investigaciones  Cientificas,  and  Universidad  Nacional  de  Educacion  a 

Distancia. 
.  2003.  The  perception  of  lexical  stress  in  Spanish.  Proceedings  of  the  15''' 

International  Congress  of  Phonetic  Sciences,  2023-6.  Barcelona:  Universitat 

Autonoma  de  Barcelona. 
Martinez-Gil,  Fernando  &  Alfonso  Morales-Front  (eds.).  1997.  Issues  in  the 

Phonology  and  Morphology  of  the  Major  Iberian  Languages.  Washington, 

DC:  Georgetown  University  Press. 
Morales-Front,  Alfonso.  1999.  El  acento.  In:  Cederio  &  Morales-Front  (eds.), 

203-30. 
MORIN,  Regina.  2002.  Coronal  and  velar  softening  in  Spanish:  Theoretical, 

historical  and  empirical  evidence  of  lexicalization.  Southwest  Journal  of 

Linguistics  21:1.137-63. 
Pens  ADO,  Carmen.  1997.  On  the  Spanish  depalatalization  of  /fU  and  //U  in  rhymes. 

In  Martinez-Gil  &  Morales-Front  (eds.),  595-618. 
Quilis,  Antonio.  1971.  Caracterizacion  fonetica  del  acento  espanol.  Travaux  de 

Linguistique  et  de  Litterature  9.53-72. 
ROCA,  Iggy.  1990.  Diachrony  and  synchrony  in  Spanish  word  stress.  Journal  of 

Linguistics  26.133-64. 

.  1999.  Stress  in  the  Romance  languages.  In:  van  der  Hulst  (ed.),  659-81 1. 

Saltarelli,  Mario.  1999.  Stress  in  Spanish  and  Latin:  Where  morphology  meets 

prosody.  In:  Martinez-Gil  &  Morales-Front  (eds.),  665-94. 
Sebeok,  T.  1973.  Diachronic,  Areal,  and  Typological  Linguistics.  (Current  Trends 

in  Linguistics,  2)  The  Hague:  Mouton. 
VAN  DER  HULST,  Harry  (ed.).  1999.  Word  Prosodic  Systems  in  the  Languages  of 

Europe.  BerUn:  Mouton  de  Gruyter. 
Waltermire,  Mark.  2004.  The  effect  of  syllable  weight  on  the  determination  of 

spoken  stress  in  Spanish.  In:  Face  (ed.). 


I 


I 

.udies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences 
olume  32,  Number  2  (Fall  2002) 

ACCENTUAL  VARIATION  AND  CONVERGENCE  IN 
NORTHEASTERN  BIZKAIAN  BASQUE 

Jose  Ignacio  Hualde*  and  Itziar  Aramaiot 

*  University  of  Illinois  at  Urbana-Champaign 

*jihualde@uiuc.edu 

titziaramayo@msn.com 

In  this  paper  we  systematically  compare  the  accentual  systems 
employed  in  the  local  Basque  dialects  of  a  small  area  of  northeastern 
Bizkaia.  We  show  that  although  lexical  accents  were  historically 
regularized  on  different  syllables  in  the  varieties  of  Ondarroa  and 
Markina  (penultimate  vs.  antepenultimate  syllable),  later  shared 
processes  of  syllable  contraction  have  tended  to  restore  agreement 
between  the  two  varieties  in  the  surface  patterns  of  accentuation  of 
nominals.  In  the  accentuation  of  verbal  forms,  on  the  other  hand, 
important  differences  and  even  opposite  patterns  are  found.  Here  we 
offer  some  details  of  the  variation  found  in  this  respect,  considering 
also  the  competitions  of  variants  in  the  variety  of  Berriatura,  a  rural 
area  geographically  located  between  Markina  and  Ondarroa. 

1.      Introduction 

In  this  paper  we  consider  aspects  of  accentual  variation  in  the  Basque  varieties  of 
the  Markina-Ondarroa  region,  in  the  northeastern  corner  of  the  province  of 
Bizkaia.  The  area  under  study  includes  the  coastal  town  of  Ondarroa,  the  town  of 
Markina,  some  11  km  inland  from  Ondarroa,  and  the  smaller  township  of 
Berriatua,  four  kilometers  from  Ondarroa  and  seven  from  Markina.  Whereas  both 
Ondarroa  and  Markina  are  relatively  large  towns  (Ondarroa  has  9761  inhabitants 
and  Markina,  4770),  Berriatua  is  a  rural  zone  which  has  1083  inhabitants,  almost 
all  of  them  Basque  speakers,  spread  over  a  wide  municipal  area.' 

Traditionally,  the  variety  of  Markina  has  enjoyed  considerable  prestige,  since 
it  was  used  in  writing  by  some  of  the  first  authors  to  write  in  Bizkaian  dialect  (the 
Markina  school  of  the  18*  and  19"'  centuries).  It  was  also  the  object  of  one  of  the 
first  monographs  on  a  Basque  dialect,  W.  Rollo's  (1925)  The  Basque  Dialect  of 
Marquina.  On  its  part,  the  variety  of  Ondarroa  is  widely  perceived  as  highly 
innovative  and  idiosyncratic  and  commands  strong  local  loyalty.  Among  Ondarroa 
speakers  there  does  not  seem  to  be  any  widespread  opinion  that  the  variety  of 
Markina  is  more  worthy  of  imitation. 

If  we  see  Markina  and  Ondarroa  as  two  different  linguistic  foci,  it  is 
interesting  to  consider  the  linguistic  behavior  of  speakers  from  Berriatua,  who  are 


'  Mancomunidad  de  Lea-Artibai  (2004). 

©  2005  Jos6  Ignacio  Hualde  &  luiar  Aramaio 


18  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

exposed  to  both  local  norms.  In  this  paper  we  concentrate  on  facts  of  accentuation. 
The  accentual  system  of  Ondarroa  Basque  has  been  described  and  analyzed  in 
Rotaetxe  (1978a,  1978b),  Hualde  (1995,  1996)  and  Arregi  (2002,  2004).  An 
analysis  of  the  accentual  system  of  Markina  is  found  in  Hualde  (2000)  (RoUo  1925 
does  not  include  any  information  on  accentuation).  Aramaio  (2003),  in  a 
preliminary  study  of  the  Berriatua  accentual  system,  found  that,  generally 
speaking,  Berriatua  agrees  with  Markina  in  the  accenmation  of  words  and  phrases, 
although  young  speakers  tend  to  prefer  Ondarroa  forms  in  some  specific  cases, 
particularly  in  verbal  forms. 

The  area  under  study  is  at  the  boundary  of  the  Northern  Bizkaian  accentual 
type.  Two  defining  characteristics  of  the  Northern  Bizkaian  accentual  type  are  (a) 
the  existence  of  a  lexical  contrast  between  accented  and  unaccented  words  and  (b) 
the  presence  of  tonal  plateaux,  where  the  tone  rises  from  the  first  to  the  second 
syllable  of  the  phrase  and  stays  high  up  to  the  first  accented  syllable,  which  is 
associated  with  a  falling  contour  (HL)  (see  Azkue  1923,  1931-32;  Jacobsen  1972; 
Hualde  1993a,  1999;  Elordieta  1997;  Hualde,  Elordieta,  Gaminde,  &  Srailjanic 
2002). 

The  variety  spoken  in  the  next  town  going  east  along  the  coast,  Mutriku, 
akeady  in  Gipuzkoa,  has  property  (b)  but  appears  to  completely  lack  the  class  of 
lexically  accented  word  (i.e.,  there  are  no  accentual  contrasts,  see  Gaminde  1998: 
140-1).  Further  east,  in  Deba  we  already  find  an  accentual  system  of  the  rather 
different  Central  type,  with  regular  accentual  prominence  on  the  second  syllable 
(see  Txillardegi  1984;  Hualde  1991).  South  of  Markina,  the  Mallabia  accentual 
system  is  transitional  towards  the  Central  type  (see  Hualde,  Mugarza,  &  Zuazo 
2002). 

In  the  next  two  sections,  the  accentual  patterns  of  lexically  unaccented  and 
accented  words  will  be  considered  separately.  Both  types  of  words  have 
undergone  a  number  of  changes  in  the  Markina-Ondarroa  region  as  a  result  of 
which  their  patterns  are  rather  different  from  those  of  more  conservative  varieties 
found  further  west.  Although  in  some  important  cases  (in  lexically  accented 
words)  the  varieties  of  Markina  and  Ondarroa  have  adopted  different  solutions,  in 
general  we  find  a  high  degree  of  convergence  throughout  the  area,  even  in  some 
very  unusual  developments.  Divergent  accentual  patterns  have  nevertheless  arisen 
in  certain  verbal  forms.  In  this  particular  case,  we  find  that  corresponding  forms  in 
Markina  and  Ondarroa  have  ended  up  with  opposite  accentual  patterns  and  there  is 
also  a  considerable  amount  of  variation  in  the  speech  of  speakers  from  Berriatua 
and  Markina.  These  verbal  forms  are  considered  in  the  last  section. 

2.       Lexically  unaccented  words 

2.1.    General  case 

As  mentioned,  an  essential  feature  of  all  northern  Bizkaian  varieties  is  the 
existence  of  a  contrast  between  lexically  accented  and  unaccented  words.^ 
Lexically  unaccented  words  are  subject  to  a  rule  of  sentential  accent  (SA)  if  final 


HUALDE  &  ARAMAIO:  ACCENTUAL  VARIATION  AND  CONVERGENCE 


19 


in  a  phrase  pronounced  in  isolation  or  in  immediately  preverbal  position. 
Otherwise  they  do  not  have  accentual  prominence  on  any  syllable.  The  SA  rule  is 
very  simple  in  the  rest  of  the  Northern  Bizkaian  area:  SA  is  assigned  to  the  last 
syllable  of  the  phrase.  In  the  Markina-Ondarroa  region,  however,  facts  are 
somewhat  more  complicated,  with  a  morphologically  and  lexically-conditioned 
alternation  between  final  and  penultimate  accent.  These  complications  in  the 
assignment  of  SA  have  arisen  from  two  distinct  developments. 

First  of  all,  as  in  other  areas  to  the  east  and  south,  the  sentential  accent  was 
historically  retracted  from  the  final  syllable  to  the  penultimate  syllable  of  the 
phrase.^  Compare  the  Ondarroa  and  Markina  examples  in  Table  l"*  with  those  for 
Lekeitio,  a  coastal  town  to  the  west  of  Ondarroa,  where  SA  is  uniformly  phrase 
final,  as  in  the  rest  of  the  Northern  Bizkaian  area  (leftmost  column):" 

Table  1.  Lexically  unaccented  words:  Sentential  accent  rule 


Lekeitio 


Ondarroa 


Markina/Berriatua 


Gloss 


gixona 
gixona  ra 
gixon  andidxa  ra 
gixona  dator 


gixona 
gixona  ra 
gixon  andixe  ra 
gixona  dator 


gisona 
gisona  da 
gison  andixe  da 
gisona  dator 


'the  man' 
'(it)  is  the  man' 
'(it)  is  the  big  man' 
'the  man  is  coming' 


This  situation  has  been  made  more  complex  in  the  Markina-Ondarroa  region 
by  a  rule  of  vowel  deletion.  In  Markina  there  is  variable  deletion  of  final  Id  in 
hiatus.  This  deletion  rule,  which  is  becoming  more  frequent  in  the  speech  of  the 
younger  generations,  produces  phrase  final  accent  again,  since  it  is  not 
accompanied  by  accent  retraction.  In  Ondarroa,  this  deletion  process  became 
obligatory  some  decades  ago  and  there  is  no  variation  in  this  respect: 

Table  2.  Deletion  of  /-e/:    e  >  0  /  V 


Markina 

Ondarroa 

Gloss 

gure  alabi(e) 
esku(e) 

gure  alabi 
esku 

'our  daughter' 
'the  hand' 

The  consequence  of  this  process  of  vowel  deletion  is  that  SA  is  now  phrase- 
final  in  some  cases  and  phrase-penultimate  in  other  cases:  when  the  last  word  of 
the  phrase  is  lexically  unaccented,  there  is  final  accent  in  inflected  singular 
phrases  ending  in  a  high  vowel.  Otherwise  SA  is  penultimate.  This  has  created  an 
accentual  contrast  between  uninflected  and  inflected  singular  phrases: 


This  development  also  took  place  in  southern  Bizkaia  (Arratia  and  Zeberio,  see  Etxebarria  1991 ;  Hualde 
1992)  and  in  Gipuzkoa  (see  Hualde  1993b,  1999). 

Basque  orthography:  x  is  a  voiceless  prepalatal  fricative  and  Dr  is  a  voiceless  prepalatal  affricate.  dx\sa. 
voiced  prepalatal  segment  with  both  fi-icative  and  affricate  realizations  (found  in  Lekeitio,  but  not  in  the 
varieties  of  the  Ondarroa-Markina  area).  In  this  papery  represents  a  voiceless  (post-)velar  fricative. 

On  Lekeitio  accentuation  and  intonation  see  Azkue  (1931-32),  Hualde,  Elordieta,  &  Elordieta  (1993, 
1994),  Hualde  (1997:193-201),  Elordieta  (1997,  2003),  and  Elordieta  &  Hualde  (2003). 


20 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

Table  3.  Ondarroa:  Accentual  alternations  arising  from 
historical  vowel  deletion 


Uninflected 

Absolutive  sg. 

lau  seme 
lau  beso 

'four  sons' 
'four  arms' 

gure  semi 
nire  besu 

'our  son' 
'my  arm' 

It  is  interesting  to  note,  in  this  respect,  that  the  relationship  between 
uninflected  and  inflected  forms  is  quite  different  from  what  we  find  in  standard 
Basque  or  in  Literary  Bizkaian,  a  conservative  dialect  that  in  all  likelihood 
represents  a  stage  in  the  historical  evolution  of  Markina  and  Ondarroa  Basque.  In 
Table  4  we  give  examples  of  uninflected  nouns  ending  in  a  consonant  and  in  all 
five  vowels  and  their  corresponding  absolutive  singular  forms  in  Literary  Bizkaian 
and  in  the  Lekeitio  variety.''  It  is  obvious  that  the  absolutive  singular  can  be 
straightforwardly  derived  from  the  uninflected  stem  by  addition  of  -a  and  the 
application  of  a  few  phonological  rules  (in  Literary  Bizkaian  only  in  the  case  of 
stems  ending  in  -a).  These  forms  are  to  be  compared  with  their  cognates  in 
Markina  and  Ondarroa  given  in  Table  5.  Clearly  the  correspondences  between 
uninflected  and  inflected  forms  are  less  straightforward. 

All  examples  are  lexically  unaccented.  The  accent  marks  show  the  accentual 
pattern  of  these  words  in  phrase-final  position  (that  is,  in  the  environment  for  SA). 

Table  4.  Uninflected  and  absolutive  sg.  forms  in  conservative  dialects 


Literary  Bizkaian 

Lekeitio 

Gloss 

Uninflected 

Abs.  sg. 

Uninflected 

Abs.  sg. 

gizon 

gizona 

gixon 

gixona 

'man' 

lagun 

laguna 

lagiin 

laguna 

'friend' 

alaba 

alabea 

alaba 

alabia 

'daughter' 

seme 

semea 

seme 

semia 

'son' 

mendi 

mendia 

mendi 

mendidxa 

'mountain' 

beso 

besoa 

beso 

besua 

'arm' 

esku 

eskua 

esku 

eskua 

'hand' 

Table  5.  Uninflected  and  absolutive  sg.  forms  in  Markina  and  Ondarroa 


Markina 

Ondarroa 

Gloss 

Uninflected 

Abs.  sg. 

Uninflected 

Abs.  sg. 

gison 

gisona 

gixon 

gixona 

'man' 

lagun 

lagiine 

lagun 

lagune 

'friend' 

alaba 

alabi(e) 

alaba 

alabi 

'daughter' 

seme 

semi(e) 

seme 

semi 

'son' 

mendi 

mendixe 

mendi 

mendixe 

'mountain' 

beso 

besu(e) 

beso 

besii 

'arm' 

esko 

eskii(e) 

esko 

eskii 

'hand' 

For  variation  among  Basque  dialects  in  this  respect,  see  Hualde  &  Gaminde  (1998). 


HUALDE  &  ARAMAIO:  ACCENTUAL  VARIATION  AND  CONVERGENCE 


21 


In  Ondarroa,  where  deletion  is  obligatory,  thus,  the  rule  of  SA  assignment  is 
now  the  following:  SA  IS  assigned  to  the  final  syllable  if  the  last  word  in 

THE  PHRASE  IS  A  LEXICALLY  UNACCENTED  SINGULAR  WORD  ENDING  IN  A  HIGH 
VOWEL,  AND  TO  THE  PENULTIMATE  SYLLABLE  OF  THE  PHRASE  OTHERWISE.  Notice, 
incidentally,  that  the  historical  contrast  between  the  final  back  vowels  l-ol  and  l-wl 
has  been  neutralized:  all  words  that  etymologically  ended  in  /-u/  in  their 
uninflected  form  now  end  in  l-ol  and  have  absolutive  singular  forms  in  l-wl  (with 
the  exception  of  monosyllabic  su  Tire'). 

Since  the  shift  of  SA  to  the  penultimate  took  place  both  in  Ondarroa  and 
Markina  and  the  process  of  vowel  deletion  is  becoming  obligatory  in  Markina  as 
well,  in  the  case  of  unaccented  phrases  we  find  the  same  accentual  patterns  in  the 
whole  Markina-Ondarroa  area. 

2.2.    Special  cases 

2.2.1.  In  addition  to  phrase-final  SA  which  has  its  origin  in  the  deletion  of  Id  in 
hiatus,  we  also  find  final  accent  in  two  cases  where  an  intervocalic  tap  -r-  has  been 
deleted.  One  of  these  cases  is  in  the  dative,  where  -ari  >  -ai  [aj].  In  this  case  the 
sequence  of  rising  sonority  has  become  a  diphthong,  as  shown  in  Table  6  (a). 
Arguably,  since  there  is  no  contrast  between  bisy liable  [a.i]  and  monosyllabic  [aj], 
forms  ending  in  a  final  diphthong  can  be  considered  to  represent  phonological 
penultimate  accent  assignment.  We  find  the  same  pattern  in  other  instances  of 
final  sequences  of  falling  sonority,  both  resulting  from  the  deletion  of  -r-,  as  in 
Table  6  (b),  and  from  other  origins,  as  in  Table  6  (c): 

Table  6.  Final  sentential  accent  in  words  ending  in  a  diphthong 

a.  lagunari  >  0/M  lagunai         'to  the  friend  (dat.sg.)' 

b.  lau  pelotari  >  O  lau  pelotai  'four  ball  players' 

c.  *patrone  >  patrol  'boss' 

2.2.2.  Regarding  the  example  in  Table  6  (c),  in  Markina,  and  optionally  in 
Berriatua,  the  falling  diphthong  [oj]  is  simplified  by  deletion  of  the  glide.  This 
results  in  another  set  of  vowel-final  nominals  with  final  accent  in  their  uninflected 
form: 

Table  7.  Markina  &  Berriatua:  oi  >  o 


patrol  >  patro  'boss' 

melokotoi  >  melokoto      'peach' 


cf.  patroie  da         '(it)  is  the  boss' 
cf.  melokotoie  da  '(it)  is  the  peach' 


Notice  that  this  results  in  two  different  uninflected/sg.  correspondences  for 
nominals  ending  in  /o/,  predictable  from  the  position  of  the  accent  in  the 
uninflected  form.  Compare,  for  instance,  the  examples  in  Table  8,  where  both  (a) 
and  (b)  are  lexically  accented  nouns  and  (c)  has  lexical  accent: 


22  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

Table  8.  Markina  &  Berriatua:  Accentual  patterns  of  nominals  ending  in  -o  in 
their  uninflected  form 


Uninflected 

sg.,  phrase-final 

sg.,  non-phrase-final 

a. 

baso  bat  'a  forest' 

basii  'the  forest' 

basu  de  '(it)  is  the  forest' 

b. 

patro  bat  'a  boss' 

patroie  'the  boss' 

patroie  da  '(it)  is  the  boss' 

c. 

baso  bat  'a  glass' 
(lexical  accent) 

basu  'the  glass' 

basu  de  '(it)  is  the  glass' 

2.2.3.  There  is  also  final  accent  in  the  allative  where  the  -r-  of  the  suffix  has  been 
lost  after  a  nonhigh  vowel.  Surprisingly,  in  Ondarroa  we  find  final  accent  not  only 
with  stems  ending  in  a  low  vowel,  where  the  original  sequence  -ara  has  become  -a, 
but  also  with  stems  ending  in  a  mid  vowel,  where  the  deletion  of  -r-  does  not 
create  a  diphthong.  In  Ondarroa  the  evolution  has  been  as  illustrated  in  Table  9: 

Table  9.  Ondarroa:  Allative  sg. 


eliza-ra 

> 

elixa 

'to  the  church' 

etxe-ra 

> 

etxea 

'to  the  house' 

mendi-ra 

> 

mendire 

'to  the  mountain' 

beso-ra 

> 

besoa  ~  besiire 

'to  the  arm' 

esku-ra 

> 

esktire  ~  eskoa 

'to  the  hand' 

Whereas  in  the  case  of  /a/-final  stems,  final  accent  can  be  explained  as  a 
result  of  historical  contraction  (elixdra  >  elixda  >  elixd),  final  accent  in  forms  like 
etxed  and  besod  is  more  difficult  to  explain,  since  the  resulting  sequences  are 
heterosyllabic  {e.txe.d).  Notice  also  that  the  deletion  of  the  intervocalic  -r-  and  the 
shift  of  the  accent  to  the  last  vowel  of  the  word  occur  together.  A  consequence  of 
the  collapse  of  the  historical  contrasts  between  /©/-final  and  /u/-final  stems,  is  that 
words  from  both  etymological  classes  vary  between  -od  and  -lire  in  their  allative 
form.  Some  speakers  use  both  forms  in  what  appears  to  be  free  variation  and  other 
speakers  use  only  one  of  the  two,  regardless  of  etymological  class.  As  shown,  the 
variant  without  the  -r-  also  has  final  accent.  In  Markina  only  the  forms  in  -ure  are 
used  {besiire,  eskiire),  but  with  stems  in  /e/  the  sequence  is  further  contracted: 
etxera  >  M  etxd. 

In  Berriatua  for  /e/  stems  there  is  variation  between  full  forms  that  maintain 
the  etymological  intervocalic  -r-  and  contracted  forms  like  in  Markina.  Again,  the 
contracted  forms  have  final  accent.  With  /o/-stems  there  is  no  deletion.  Whereas 
nouns  belonging  to  the  etymological  /u/-final  class  form  their  allative  in  -ure,  with 
etymologically  /o/-final  stems  there  is  synchronic  variation  between  -ora  and  -ure, 
without  contraction: 


I 


HuALDE  &  Aramaio:  Accentual  Variation  and  Convergence 


23 


Table  10.  Berriatua:  Allative  sg. 

Uninflected 

Allative  sg. 

Gloss 

elixa 

elixa 

'to  the  church' 

kale 

kalera  ~  kala 

'to  the  street' 

etxe 

etxera  ~  etxa 

'to  the  house' 

berde 

berdera  ~  berda 

'to  the  green  one' 

mendi 

mendire 

'to  the  mountain' 

baso 

basora  ~  basiire 

'to  the  forest' 

esko 

eskure 

'to  the  hand' 

Perhaps  the  position  of  the  accent  in  Ondarroa  forms  like  etxed  is  to  be 
explained  as  a  case  of  interdialectal  influence. 

To  conclude  this  section,  in  the  assignment  of  SA  we  don't  find  any 
important  differences  among  the  varieties  of  Markina,  Berriatua  and  Ondarroa. 
Certain  developments  have  resulted  in  SA  being  phrase-penultimate  in  some  cases 
and  phrase-final  in  other  cases,  but  these  developments  have  been  common 
throughout  this  geographical  area. 


3.      Lexically  accented  words 

3.1.    General  rule 

In  the  position  of  the  accent  in  lexically  accented  words  we  do  find  some 
significant  differences  between  the  dialects  of  Ondarroa,  on  the  one  hand,  and 
Markina  and  Berriatua  on  the  other. 

Lexically  accented  words  always  surface  with  an  accent  on  a  given  syllable, 
regardless  of  their  syntactic  position.  The  contrast  is  evident  in  non-phrase  final 
position,  as  in  the  examples  for  Ondarroa  in  Table  11.  The  words  leko  'place'  and 
plural  lagunan  'of  the  friends'  bear  a  lexical  accent,  whereas  esko  'hand',  lagunan 
'of  the  friend'  and  the  rest  of  the  words  in  the  examples  are  lexically  unaccented: 

Table  11.  Ondarroa:  Accented  vs.  unaccented  contrast  phrase-medially 


esko  andixe  ra 
leko  andixe  ra 

'it  is  a  big  hand' 
'it  is  a  big  place' 

lagunan  etxf  re 
lagunan  etxf  re 

'it  is  the  house  of  the  friend' 
'it  is  the  house  of  the  friends' 

In  most  Northern  Bizkaian  varieties,  lexically  accented  words  may  carry  an 
accent  on  any  non-fmal  syllable.  Thus,  for  instance,  within  a  couple  of  randomly 
selected  pages  of  Gilisasti's  (2003)  dictionary  of  the  northwestern  variety  of 
Urduliz,  we  find  examples  with  initial  accent  like  euskera  'Basque  language', 
eskonteko  'about  to  get  married',  eskupeko  'hidden  tip';  with  accent  on  the  second 
syllable,  examples  like  eskole  'school',  eskobaki  'type  of  bush',  eskondute  'the  act 
of  getting  married',  eskubere  'rake';  and  on  the  third  syllable,  eskillere  'staircase'. 


24  Studes  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

eskonduparri  'newly  wed'.^  From  these  examples  we  can  also  see  that  there  is  no 
uniformity  regarding  the  position  of  the  accent  if  we  count  from  the  end  of  the 
word  either. 

Importantly,  plural  and  some  other  suffixes  place  an  accent  on  the 
immediately  preceding  syllable  (they  are  preaccenting  suffixes),  but  if  the  stem  is 
accented,  the  accent  of  the  stem  prevails.  For  instance,  in  eskii-ek  'the  hands'  and 
etxe-tik  'from  the  house'  the  accent  occurs  immediately  before  the  accented  suffix, 
but  with  a  lexically  accented  stem  we  have  leku-ek  'the  places'  and  leku-tik  'from 
the  place'.  In  the  varieties  of  Markina  and  Ondarroa,  as  well  as  in  neighboring 
Lekeitio,  most  of  these  contrasts  in  the  position  of  lexical  accents  have  been 
neutralized,  with  generalization  of  one  of  the  patterns,  as  shown  in  Table  12.  In 
Lekeitio  and  Ondarroa  almost  all  lexical  accents  surface  on  the  penultimate 
syllable  of  the  word.  In  Markina  and  Berriatua,  on  the  other  hand,  there  has  been 
historically  regularization  of  lexical  accents  on  the  antepenultimate  syllable 
(without  contraction): 

Table  12.  Distribution  of  lexical  accents 


Gemika 

Lekeitio 

Ondarroa 

Markina  & 
Berriatua 

Gloss 

eskuek 

eskuek 

eskuk 

esku(e)k 

'the  hands' 

etxetik 

etxetik 

etxetik 

etxetik 

'from  the  house' 

lekuek 

lekuek 

lekuk 

leku(e)k 

'the  places' 

lekutik 

lekutik 

lekiitik 

lekutik 

'from  the  place' 

mendidxek 

mendidxak 

mendixak 

mendixek 

'the  mountains' 

mendidxetatik 

mendidxetatik 

mendixetatik 

mendixetatik 

'from  the 
mountains' 

lekuetatik 

lekuetatik 

lekutatik 

lekuetatik  ~ 
lekutatik 

'from  the  places" 

What  is  common  to  the  varieties  of  the  Markina-Ondarroa  area,  as  well  as 
neighboring  Lekeitio,  is  that  they  have  fewer  contrasts  regarding  the  position  of 
lexical  accents  than  the  varieties  of  the  Gemika-Getxo  area.  In  the  Gernika-Getxo 
system  the  position  of  lexical  accents  is  free,  since  it  is  determined  by  the  position 
of  the  leftmost  lexically  (pre-)accented  morpheme.  In  Lekeitio.  Ondarroa,  Markina 
and  Berriatua,  on  the  other  hand,  lexical  accents  are  assigned  to  a  given  syllable 
counting  from  the  end  of  the  word.  The  syllable  that  attracts  the  accent  is  the 
penultimate  in  Lekeitio  and  Ondarroa  but  the  antepenultimate  in  Markina  and 
Berriatua. 


*  For  the  rules  governing  accent  assignment  in  the  varieties  of  this  area,  see  Huaide  (1989),  Hualde  & 
Bilbao  (1992,  1993). 


HuALDE  &  Aramaio:  Accentual  Variation  and  Convergence       25 
Table  13.  Generalizations  regarding  lexical  accent 


I.  Gemika-Getxo 

A  lexical  accent  may  occur  on  any  nonfinal  syllable.  In 
morphologically  complex  words,  the  leftmost  accented 
morpheme  determines  the  position  of  the  accent. 

II.  Lekeitio  and 
Ondarroa 

Words  containing  one  or  more  lexically  accented 
morphemes  surface  with  an  accent  on  the  penultimate 
syllable. 

III.  Markina  and 
Berriatua 

Words  containing  one  or  more  lexically  accented 
morphemes  surface  with  an  accent  on  the  antepenultimate 
syllable  (before  optional  vowel  deletion). 

We  may  note  in  Table  1 2  above  that,  even  though  in  Ondarroa  and  Lekeitio 
we  have  penultimate  accent,  in  Ondarroa  lexical  accents  do  not  fall  on  the  same 
vowel  as  in  Lekeitio  in  cases  where  there  has  been  contraction.  On  the  other  hand, 
in  cases  where  a  vowel  in  the  last  syllable  has  been  lost,  Ondarroa  and  Markina 
have  the  accent  on  the  same  syllable.  That  is,  whereas  the  antepenultimate  accent 
rule  of  Markina  and  Berriatua  applies  to  noncontracted  forms,  in  Ondarroa,  where 
accent  is  penultimate,  the  penultimate  accent  rule  applies  to  (obligatorily) 
contracted  forms. 

More  examples  illustrating  the  contexts  where  Ondarroa  and  Markina  words 
have  the  same  and  different  accentuation  are  given  in  Table  14  for  the 
absolutive/ergative  plural: 

Table  14.  Abs./erg.  pi.  (a):  accent  on  different  syllable  in  O  &  M,  (b):  accent  on 

same  syllable 


Ondarroa 

Markina  &  Berriatua 

Gloss 

a. 

gixonak 
lagunak 
mendixak 

gisonak 
lagunek 
mendixek 

'men' 

'friends' 

'mountains' 

b. 

etxik 
buruk 
pelotaixek 
melokotoik 

etxi(e)k 
buru(e)k 
pelotarixek 
melokotoiek 

'houses' 
'heads' 
'ball  players' 
'peaches' 

It  is  probably  the  case  that  historically  in  Ondarroa  the  deletion  of  vowels  in 
hiatus  became  obligatory  before  the  penultimate  lexical  accent  rule  was  adopted. 
In  Markina,  instead,  vowel  deletion  is  a  more  recent  phenomenon,  which  postdates 
the  adoption  of  the  antepenultimate  generalization. 

The  application  of  the  rules  of  penultimate  accent  in  Lekeitio  and  Ondarroa 
vs.  antepenultimate  accent  in  Markina  is  further  illustrated  in  Table  15,  which 
shows  accent  displacement  as  longer  suffixes  are  added  in  plural  forms. 


26  Studes  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

Table  15.  Shift  of  lexical  accent  to  penultimate  syllable  in  L  &  O  and  to  the 

antepenultimate  in  M  (&  B) 


Gemika 

Lekeitio 

Ondarroa 

Markina 

Gloss 

lagunek 

lagunek 

lagunak 

lagunek 

'the  friends' 

lagunena 

lagunena 

lagunana 

lagunena 

'the  one  of  the 
friends' 

lagunentzat 

lagunentzat 

lagunantzat 

lagunentzat 

'for  the  friends' 

lagiinentzako 

lagunentzako 

lagunantzako 

lagunentzako 

'for  the  friends' 

lagiinentzakoa 

lagunentzakua 

lagunentzaku 

lagunentzaku(e) 

'the  one  for  the 
friends' 

The  shift  of  all  lexical  accents  to  the  penultimate,  as  in  Lekeitio  and 
Ondarroa  can  be  understood  as  a  strengthening  of  the  strongest  pattern,  since  in 
most  cases  penultimate  accent  would  be  the  most  common  pattern  before  the 
change.  The  Markina  shift  has  a  less  obvious  origin.  As  argued  in  Hualde  (2000), 
the  generalization  of  antepenultimate  accentuation  with  lexically  accented  words 
in  Markina  can  be  seen  as  a  sort  of  reaction  to  the  retraction  of  the  accent  to  the 
penultimate  of  the  phrase  in  lexically  unaccented  phrases.  That  is,  the 
(phonetically-motivated)  shift  in  the  singular  lagune  >  lagiine  'the  friend'  may 
have  triggered  the  "compensatory"  shift  lagunek  >  lagunek  'the  friends' . 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  in  Ondarroa,  where  (Uke  in  Markina)  the  SA  rule  targets 
the  penultimate  of  the  phrase  (in  cases  without  contraction),  and  lexical  accents 
have  been  shifted  to  the  penultimate  of  the  word  (like  in  Lekeitio),  the  contrast 
between  lexically  unaccented  and  accented  words  is  lost  in  the  specific  case  where 
word  and  phrasal  domains  coincide.  As  we  see  in  Table  16,  singular  and  plural 
forms  of  lexically  unaccented  stems  are  always  accented  on  different  syllables  in 
both  Lekeitio  and  Markina.  In  Ondarroa,  on  the  other  hand,  the  sg./pl.  accentual 
difference  is  neutralized  in  case  the  word  is  phrase-fmal. 

Table  16.  Lexically  unaccented  and  accented  words 


Lekeitio 

Ondarroa 

Markina 

Gloss 

a. 

gixona 
gixona  ra 

gixona 
gixona  ra 

gisona 
gisona  da 

'the  man' 

'(he)  is  the  man' 

b. 

gixonak 
gixonak  dis 

gixonak 
gixonak  dis 

gisonak 
gisonak  di 

'the  men' 

'(they)  are  the  men' 

In  the  Ondarroa  example  in  (a)  in  Table  16  both  singular  noun  and  clitic  verb 
are  lexically  unaccented  and  SA  falls  on  the  penultimate  syllable  of  the  phrase.  In 
(b)  the  plural  genitive  suffix  introduces  a  lexical  accent  in  the  noun,  which 
surfaces  on  the  penultimate  OF  THE  WORD.  In  Lekeitio  there  is  phrase-final  accent 
in  (a)  vs.  word-penultimate  in  (b).  In  Markina  the  contrast  is  between  phrase- 
penultimate  in  (a)  and  word-antepenultimate  in  (b).  It  is  thus  clear  that  the 
Ondarroa  accentual  system  is  more  opaque  than  both  that  of  Lekeitio  and  that  of 
Markina,  since  a  contrast  that  is  made  phrase-medially  is  neutralized  when  the 
word  is  in  phrase-final  position  (Hualde  1995). 


HUALDE  &  ARAMAIO:  ACCENTUAL  VARIATION  AND  CONVERGENCE  27 


Another  illustration  is  given  in  Table  17.  Notice  that  in  Ondarroa  the  contrast 
betweeen  (a)  and  (b)  is  neutralized  in  (a')  and  (b'),  which  are  identical,  since  word 
and  phrase  coincide  in  this  case  (for  further  exemplification  see  Hualde  1995). 
This  neutralization  does  not  obtain  in  Markina,  since  lexical  accents  have  been 
generalized  to  the  antepenultimate  of  the  word  instead. 

Table  17.  Neutralization  of  accentual  contrast  phrase-finally  in  Ondarroa  vs. 
preservation  of  contrast  in  Markina  &  Berriatua 


Ondarroa 

Markina  &  Berriatua 

Gloss 

a. 
a', 
b. 
b'. 

lagunana  ra 
lagunana 
lagunana  ra 
lagunana 

lagunana  da 
lagunana 
lagunena  da 
lagunena 

'it  is  the  one  of  the  friend' 
'the  one  of  the  friend' 
'it  is  the  one  of  the  friends' 
'the  one  of  the  friends' 

It  is  thus  possible  to  see  a  functional  motivation  in  the  shift  of  lexical  accents 
to  the  antepenultimate  syllable  in  Markina  and  Berriatua.  In  this  way,  the  broader 
generalization  that  with  unaccented  stems  the  accent  falls  earlier  in  the  plural  than 
in  the  singular  is  preserved  in  all  sentential  contexts. 

In  lexically  accented  words  it  would  thus  appear  that  Markina  and  Ondarroa 
have  substantially  different  patterns:  word-antepenultimate  vs.  word-penultimate. 
However,  as  already  mentioned  above,  vowel  deletion  in  Markina  creates 
convergence  between  both  dialects  in  all  cases  where  a  vowel  in  the  final  syllable 
is  lost.  The  rules  in  Table  13  above  are  rephrased  in  Table  18,  with 
exemplification  in  Table  19. 

Table  18.  Rules  of  lexical  accent 


I.  Ondarroa 


Lexically  accented  words  have  penultimate  accent. 


II.  Markina  & 
Berriatua 


Lexically  accented  words  have  antepenultimate  accent,  except 
that  there  is  penultimate  accent  when  the  last  vowel  is  deleted. 


Although,  after  vowel  deletion,  the  accentual  generalization  is  now  more 
complex  in  Markina,  the  spread  of  this  process  in  the  same  contexts  where 
historically  it  took  place  in  Ondarroa  is  making  the  two  dialects  more  alike  in 
surface  patterns. 

Table  19.  Examples  without  and  with  vowel  deletion 


Ondarroa 

Markina  &  Berriatua 

sg. 

pi 

sg- 

Pl. 

mendixe  'mountain' 
mendixe  ra 
basu  'forest' 
basu  re 

mendixak 
mendixak  dis 
basuk 
basuk  dis 

mendixe 
mendixe  da 
basue  ~  basu 
basue  da  ~  basu  da 

mendixek 
mendixek  di 
basuek  ~  basuk 
basuek  ~  basuk  di 

3.2.   Special  cases 

Besides  arising  from  the  optional  process  of  deletion  of /-e/  after  another  vowel,  in 
Markina  penultimate  lexical  accent  is  found  in  a  few  other  more  specific  cases. 


28  Studes  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

where  an  earlier  historical  process  reduced  a  sequence  of  two  syllables  to  a  single 
one.  The  result  is,  again,  that  the  degree  to  which  the  two  varieties  of  Markina  and 
Ondarroa  differ  from  each  other  in  accentual  matters  is  actually  more  limited  than 
one  might  be  led  to  conclude  from  the  basic  rules. 

3.2.1.  An  older  process  of  contraction  is  found  in  the  absolutive  plural  (and  other 
plural  cases)  of /a/-final  stems.  These  have  penultimate  accent  in  Markina,  just  like 
in  Ondarroa;  e.g.,  aldbak  'the  daughters',  elixak  'the  churches'  (vs.  e.g.,  sdgarrak 
"the  apples',  from  sugar).  Since  historically  these  forms  had  a  long  vowel  /aa/,  it  is 
reasonable  to  assume  that  contraction  of  this  long  vowel  took  place  after 
generalization  of  antepenultimate  accent:  *aldbaak  >  aldbak. 

3.2.2.  In  addition,  in  a  couple  of  morphological  cases  there  is  penultimate  accent 
in  Markina  with  all  stems.  Consider,  to  begin  with,  the  local  plural  cases  illustrated 
in  Table  20: 

Table  20.  Local  plural  cases 


Ondarroa 

Markina 

Gloss 

mendixetan 

mendixeta 

mendixetatik 

mendixetan 

mendixeta 

mendixetatik 

'in  the  mountains',  ines.  pi. 
'to  the  mountains',  allat.  pi. 
'from  the  mountains',  abl.  pi. 

In  the  Ondarroa  examples  the  accent  is  uniformly  on  the  penultimate,  as 
expected.  In  Markina,  the  inesive  and  ablative  plural  forms  follow  the  regular 
antepenultimate  pattern  of  the  dialect.  The  allative  plural,  on  the  other  hand, 
irregularly  shows  penultimate  accent.  Historically  the  allative  plural  (like  the 
allative  singular,  see  Table  9  above)  has  undergone  contraction,  after  deletion  of 
intervocalic  -r-.  In  Markina  contraction  must  have  taken  place  after  the 
generalization  of  the  antepenultimate  accent  rule:  *mendixetara  >  *mendixetaa  > 
mendixeta.  In  Ondarroa,  on  the  other  hand,  contraction  in  this  case  (like  in  other 
cases)  must  have  preceded  penultimate  accent,  since  otherwise  we  would  find  final 
accent. 

3.2.3.  In  the  commitative  singular  as  well  we  find  the  same  accentuation  in  both 
varieties.  In  this  case  contraction  has  followed  deletion  of  intervocalic  -g-. 

Table  21.  Commitative  sg.  in  Markina,  Berriatua  &  Ondarroa 

lagiinas  'with  the  friend'       <  lagunagaz 

lekuas  'with  the  place' 

arbolias  'with  the  tree' 


3.2.4.  Just  as  we  saw  for  the  dative  singular  in  Table  6,  in  the  dative  plural  as  well 
we  find  the  same  pattern  in  both  varieties,  with  the  accent  one  syllable  further  to 
the  left  than  in  the  singular.  Strictly,  then,  the  dative  plural  has  penultimate  accent 
in  Markina  and  Berriatua  {*laguneri  >  lagunei). 


HuALDE  &  Aramaio:  Accentual  Variation  and  Convergence       29 
Table  22.  Dative  sg.  &  pi. 


dat.  sg. 
dat.  pi. 


Ondarroa 


lagunai 
lagunai 


Markina  &  Berriatua 


lagunai 
lagiinei 


3.2.5.  Lexically  accented  words  may  owe  their  accentedness  to  the  fact  that  they 
bear  an  accented  suffix,  or  the  stem  itself  maybe  lexically  accented.  As  noted  in 
Hualde  (2000:1 14)  unaccented  stems  in  their  bare  form  have  penultimate  accent  in 
Markina,  instead  of  the  expected  antepenultimate  accent.  In  Berriatua,  on  the  other 
hand,  there  is  variation  between  penultimate  and  antepenultimate  accent  in  this 
case,  even  in  the  speech  of  the  same  speaker:^ 

Table  23.  Uninflected  stems  with  lexical  accent 


Ondarroa 

Markina 

Berriatua 

Gloss 

lenguso  bat 
belarri  bat 
arbola  bat 

lengoso  bat 
belarri  bat 
arbola  bat 

lenguso  ~  lenguso  bat 
belarri  ~  belarri  bat 
arbola  ~  arbola  bat 

'a  cousin' 
'an  ear' 
'a  tree' 

3.2.6.  Finally,  there  is  another  case  where  convergence  between  Ondarroa  and 
Markina/Berriatua  is  due  to  the  fact  that  in  Ondarroa  we  irregularly  find 
antepenultimate  accent.  This  is  in  the  allative  singular  of  lexically  accented  stems. 
As  was  shown  in  Table  9  for  unaccented  stems,  the  sequences  /oa/  and  /ea/  that 
have  resulted  from  the  deletion  of  intervocalic  -r-  in  the  allative  somewhat 
unexpectedly  count  as  a  single  syllable.  In  Table  24  lexically  accented  and 
unaccented  stems  are  compared. 

Table  24.  Allative  sg.  forms  with  historical  deletion  of  -r- 


Lexically  unaccented 

Lexically  accented 

Ondarroa 

Markina 

Gloss 

Ondarroa 

Markina 

Gloss 

etxea 
besoa 
(-besiire) 

etxa 
besiire 

'to  the  house' 
'to  the  arm' 

Bflboa 

lekoa 

(~  lekure) 

Bflbora 
lekure 

'to  Bilbao' 
'to  the  place' 

To  summarize  this  section,  at  some  historical  point  both  Ondarroa  and 
Markina  regularized  the  position  of  lexical  accents  by  shifting  most  of  them  to  a 
syllable  counting  from  the  end  of  the  word.  Each  of  these  varieties,  however, 
adopted  a  different  rule.  In  Ondarroa  there  was  regularization  of  lexical  accents  on 
the  penultimate  syllable  of  the  word.  In  Markina  and  Berriatua,  on  the  other  hand, 
lexical  accents  were  shifted  to  the  antepenultimate  syllable,  thus  avoiding  the 
neutralization  between  lexically  accented  and  unaccented  words  in  phrase-final 
position   that   obtains   in   Ondarroa.   The   extent   to   which   Ondarroa   and 


'  The  two  variants  do  not  seem  to  have  the  same  sociolinguistic  consideration  in  Berriatua.  Some  Barriatua 
speakers  believe  that  forms  liice  lenguso,  belarri,  etc.,  are  the  proper  Berriatua  forms,  whereas  lenguso, 
belarri,  etc.,  are  said  to  be  due  to  influence  from  other  dialects,  even  if  many  Berriatua  speaicers  use  them. 
The  truth  may  be  that  the  latter  patterns  is  actually  older. 


30 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 


Markina/Berriatua  differ  in  actual  accentual  patterns  is,  however,  not  as  great  as 
one  might  expect  from  these  divergent  developments,  since  other,  more  recent, 
developments  have  produced  a  change  from  antepenultimate  to  penultimate  accent 
in  Markina  (and  Berriatua)  in  a  number  of  contexts.  The  unusual  accentual 
behavior  of  the  final  sequences  /oa/  and  /ea/  in  Ondarroa  allative  forms  also  results 
in  convergence  in  accentual  patterns  within  this  geographical  area  in  this 
morphological  context. 

4.       Verbs 

The  most  striking  examples  of  accentual  variation  in  the  Markina-Ondarroa  region 
are  found  with  some  inflected  verbal  forms.  In  some  paradigms  we  find 
completely  opposite  patterns  in  Markina  and  Ondarroa,  as  shown  in  Table  25. 

Table  25 


Ondarroa 

Markina  &  Berriatua 

Gloss 

liburu  ekarri  ban 
liburu  ekarri  ben 

liburu  ekarri  ban 
liburu  ekarri  ben 

's/he  brought  the  book' 
'they  brought  the  book' 

In  both  Ondarroa  and  Markina,  a  number  of  inflected  forms  have  final  accent 
(although  not  always  the  same  forms,  as  can  be  seen  in  Table  25).  Since  in 
nominals  (phrase-)penultimate  accent  is  general  and  final  accent  only  occurs  as  a 
result  of  contraction,  these  verbal  forms  require  special  explanations. 

4.1.    Some  cases  of  phrase-final  accent  with  inflected  monosyllabic  verbal  forms 
are  transparently  the  product  of  contraction: 

Table  26.  Phrase-final  accent  with  contracted  monosyllabic  verbs 


Ondarroa 


Markina 


Gloss 


argala  ra 
argala  ra 
mendire  ni 


argala  da 
argala  da 
mendire  dole 


<dago 
<da 
<  doa 


's/he  is  looks  thin'  (Sp.  esta) 

's/he  is  thin'  (Sp.  es) 

's/he  is  going  to  the  mountain' 


The  contrast  between  (a)  and  (b)  in  Table  26  (pointed  out  in  Hualde  1995, 
2000)  obtains  because  the  verb  in  (a)  is  etymologically  bisyllabic.  In  the  example 
in  (c)  there  has  been  contraction  in  Ondarroa,  but  the  epenthesis  of  an  intervocalic 
glide  (like  in  Lekeitio,  etc.)  has  prevented  contraction  in  Markina  (and  Berriatua). 

4.2.  Generally  in  the  northern  Bizkaian  area,  forms  carrying  the  pluralizer  -e  are 
lexically  accented.  In  Lekeitio,  for  instance,  2""*  and  3"*  person  singular  forms 
bearing  the  pluralizer  -e  have  marked  penultimate  accent.  In  Ondarroa  as  well, 
these  forms  are  special  in  their  accentuation,  but  we  find  the  mirror-image  pattern: 
forms  bearing  the  plural  -e  have  final  accent,  against  the  general  penultimate  rule 
of  the  dialect.  Compare  the  following  paradigms: 


HUALDE  &  ARAMAIO:  ACCENTUAL  VARIATION  AND  CONVERGENCE 

Table  27 


31 


Lekeitio 

Markina 

Ondarroa 

Gloss 

dot 

dot 

dot 

'I  have  it' 

dosu 

dosu 

dosu 

'you  have  it' 

dau 

dau 

dau 

's/he  has  it' 

dogiJ 

dogu 

dogu 

'we  have  it' 

dosue 

dosue 

dosue 

'you-pl.  have  it' 

dabe 

dabe 

dabe 

'they  have  it' 

nator 

nator 

nator 

'I  am  coming' 

satos 

satos 

satos 

'you  are  coming' 

dator 

dator 

dator 

's/he  is  coming' 

gatos 

gatos 

gatos 

'we  are  coming' 

satose 

satose/satose 

satose 

'you-pl.  are  coming' 

datos 

datos 

datos 

'they  are  coming' 

Notice  that  the  forms  that  are  accentually  different  from  the  rest  of  the  paradigm 
are  the  same  in  both  dialects:  those  bearing  final  -e.  The  accentual  patterns  are, 
however,  the  opposite.  The  Lekeitio  forms  are  essentially  the  same  forms  that  we 
find  elsewhere  within  the  Northern  Bizkaian  area:  the  plural  suffix  -e  is 
preaccenting.  That  is,  plural  -e  has  the  same  behavior  as  plural  suffixes  in  nominal 
inflection.  In  this  connection,  we  may  point  out  that  in  Lekeitio  the  auxiliary  forms 
corresponding  to  the  two  examples  in  Table  25  are,  respectively  ebdn  (unaccented) 
's/he  Ved  it'  and  eben  'they  Ved  it'.  What  needs  to  be  explained  is  the  Ondarroa 
pattern.  Why  does  plural  -e  trigger  final  accent  in  Ondarroa? 

We  have  seen  that  when  we  have  final  accent  in  Ondarroa  it  is  generally  the 
case  that  an  earlier  bisyllabic  sequence  has  been  contracted.  Now,  in  the  writings 
of  19"*  century  authors  from  the  Markina  area  we  find  forms  with  a  final  double 
vowel  like  dabee  'they  have  it'.  This  being  the  case,  we  may  assume  that  in 
Ondarroa,  in  this  case  as  well,  originally  there  was  penultimate  accent  and 
contraction  has  produced  final  accent:  *dabee  >  dabe.  We  may  further  assume 
that,  once  it  arose  in  this  form,  the  final  accent  pattern  was  then  spread  by  analogy 
to  other  forms  with  the  same  plural  suffix. 

The  potential  paradigm  also  provides  evidence  that  final  accented  -e  has 
resulted  from  contraction  followed  by  analogical  generalization.  Potential  forms 
bear  the  suffix  /-ke/,  after  which  plural  l-d  is  added  in  the  second  and  third  person 
plural.  In  Markina,  potential  forms  have  penultimate  accent,  except  that  final 
accent  may  occur  in  the  second  and  third  person  plural  when  the  sequence  /-kee/  is 
contracted  (Another  possibility  in  Markina  is  dissimilation:  -kee  >  -kie).  We  may 
surmise  that  contraction  became  obligatory  in  Ondarroa,  after  which  final  accent 
spread  to  the  rest  of  the  paradigm,  since  all  these  forms  would  appear  to  have  the 
same  ending.  That  is,  leikee  >  leike  'they  can'  and  hence,  by  analogy,  leike  >  leike 
's/he  can'  and  neike  >  neike  'I  can',  etc.,  see  Table  28. 


32 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 
Table  28.  Potential 


Ondarroa 

Markina 

1  sg. 

neike 

neike 

2sg. 

seinke 

seinke 

3sg. 

leike 

leike 

Ipl. 

geinke 

geinke 

2  pi. 

seinke 

seinkie  ~  seinkee  ~  seinke 

3pl. 

leike 

leikie  ~  leikee  ~  leikee 

Consider  now  the  paradigm  of  eroan  'to  carry,  take'.  This  verb,  being  an  old 
causative,  is  etymologically  accented  in  all  its  forms  (see  Hualde  1993a).  This  is 
what  we  find  in  Lekeitio,  where  with  this  verb  all  forms  are  lexically  accented  and 
have  penultimate  accent.  Just  like  in  nouns  with  accented  stems,  there  is  no 
accentual  contrast  between  singular  and  plural:  with  this  verb  the  forms  with  final 
-e  (2"''  and  3"*  plural)  are  not  different  from  the  rest.  In  Ondarroa,  on  the  other 
hand,  these  two  forms  have  final  accent.  It  is  thus  clear  that  final  accent  in 
Ondarroa  in  many  verb  forms  with  plural  -e  is  the  product  of  analogical  extension 
and  reinterpretation.  In  Table  29  we  give  also  the  forms  used  in  Berriatua,  for 
comparison.  As  can  be  seen,  in  Berriatua,  forms  with  antepenultimate  accent 
compete  with  Ondarroa-style  forms  (variants  listed  first  are  more  frequent): 

Table  29.  eroan  'to  carry,  take',  present 


Lekeitio 

Ondarroa 

Berriatua 

daroiat 

darut 

daroiet 

Isg. 

daroiasu 

danisu 

daroiesu 

2sg. 

daroia 

daru 

daroie 

3sg. 

daroiagu 

daruagu 

daroiegu  ~  darogu 

Ipl. 

daroiasue 

darusue 

daroiesue  ~  daroiesue 

2  pi. 

daroie 

darue 

daroie  ~  daroie 

3  pi. 

4.3.    Forms  including  a  dative  argument  (both  intransitive  and  transitive)  are" 
special  in  their  accentuation.  The  present  tense  intransitive  forms  for  a  dative 
argument    (e.g.,  'it  is  to  me,  to  you',  etc.)  are  shown  in  Table  30  for  Lekeitio, 
Ondarroa,  Berriatua  and  Ondarroa. 

Table  30.  Bivalent  intransitive  auxiliary  (present  tense) 


Lekeitio 

Ondarroa 

Berriatua 

Markina 

dxat 

gata 

(j)ate  ~  (j)ate  ~  aste 

jate  ~  jata 

Isg. 

dxatzu 

gatzu 

(j)atzu  ~  (j)atzu 

jatzu 

2sg. 

dxako 

gako 

(j)ak6  ~  (j)^o 

jako 

3sg. 

dxaku 

gasku 

(j)aku  ~  asku 

jaku 

Ipl. 

dxatziie 

gatzue 

(j)atzue  ~  (j)atzue 

jatziie 

2  pi. 

dxake 

gakoe 

(j)akue  ~  (j)akue 

jakue  ~  jakue 

3  pi. 

In  Lekeitio,  the  forms  for  a  2"''  and  3"^  person  plural  indirect  object,  which 
have  the  accented  suffix  l-d,  predictably  have  penultimate  accent,  whereas  the 


HuALDE  &  Aramaio:  Accentual  Variation  and  Convergence       33 

other  forms  have  regular  final  accent.  In  Ondarroa,  the  three  forms  for  a  plural 
indirect  have  fmal  accent.  That  is,  it  appears  that  the  pattern  of  the  two  forms 
ending  in  -e  has  been  extended  to  the  remaining  form  for  a  plural  dative.  In 
Berriatua  and  Markina  fmal  accentuation  has  been  extended  to  all  forms  of  the 
paradigm  for  some  speakers,  but  most  forms  optionally  or  variably  may  have 
penultimate  accent  as  well.  In  general,  younger  speakers  favor  fmal  accent. 

We  find  exactly  the  same  situation  with  trivalent  transitive  forms,  as  shown 
in  Table  3 1  for  Ondarroa,  Berriatua  and  Markina. 


Table  31.  Trivalent  transitive  auxiliary  (present  tense) 

Ondarroa 

Berriatua 

Markina 

Gloss 

emosta 

emoste  ~  emoste 

emoste  ~  emoste 

's/he  gave  it  to  me' 

emotzu 

emotzu  ~  emotzu 

emotzu  ~  emotzu 

's/he  gave  it  to  you' 

emotza 

emotza  ~  emotza 

emotze  ~  emotze 

's/he  gave  it  to  him/her' 

emosku 

emosku 

emosku 

's/he  gave  it  to  us' 

emotzue 

emotzue  ~  emotzue 

emotzue  ~  emotzue 

's/he  gave  it  to  you-pl.' 

emotze 

emotze  ~  emotzie  ~ 
emotze 

emotzie  ~  emotzie 

's/he  gave  it  to  them' 

As  shown  in  the  table,  the  only  form  for  which  final  accent  appears  to  be 
obligatory  for  all  speakers  is  emosku  's/he  gave  it  to  us'.  In  Berriatua  forms  for  a 
plural  argument  of  the  type  emotze  's/he  gave  it  to  them'  and  kendutze  ~  kendutze 
'they  took  it  from  them'  are  preferred  by  older  speakers,  whereas  younger 
speakers  employ  emotze  and  kendutze.  Tracing  the  historical  steps  that  gave  rise  to 
the  present  situation  in  Berriatua  and  Markina  would  require  a  very  detailed 
sociohnguistic  study. 

4.4.   There  is  also  considerable  variation  in  contexts  where  a  complementizer  is 
attached  to  a  verbal  form. 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  there  is  segmental  neutralization  between  several  pairs 
of  singular  and  plural  forms  when  a  complementizer  is  attached  to  the  verb.  In 
Ondarroa,  the  complementizer  -ela  'that'  leaves  the  accent  on  the  same  syllable 
that  would  have  it  in  the  bare  form  of  the  verb  (although  there  appears  to  be  some 
interspeaker  variation).  This  allows,  for  instance,  for  a  contrast  between 
segmentally  identical  forms  such  as  sdtosela  'that  you-sg.  are  coming',  from  sdtos, 
and  satosela  'that  you-pl.  are  coming',  from  satose.  With  the  complementizers 
-elako  'because'  and  -enin  'when',  on  the  other  hand,  the  contrast  is  neutralized. 


34 


STUDffiS  IN  THE  LINGUISTIC  SCIENCES  32:2  (FALL  2002) 
Table  32.  Ondarroa:  Verbs  with  complementizers 


a.  -ela 


you-sg.  vs.  you-pl. 

bixar  satosela  esaste  'they've  told  me  that  you-sg.  are  coming 

tomorrow'  vs. 

bixar  satosela  esaste  'they've  told  me  that  you-pl.  are  coming 

tomorrow' 

etorri  sasela  esaste  'they've  told  me  that  you-sg.  have  come'  vs. 

etorri  sasela  esaste  'they've  told  me  that  you-pl.  have  come' 


b.  -elako 
sg.  =  pi. 


you-sg.  =  you-pl. 
bixar  satoselako  (aserratu  re) 

'(s/he  has  become  angry)  because  you-sg./you-pl.  are  coming 
tomorrow' 


c.  -enm 


you-sg.  =  you-pl. 

satosenin  'when  you-sg./you-pl.  come' 

etorri  sasenin  'when  you-sg./you-pl.  arrived' 


In  Markina,  on  the  other  hand,  the  complementizer  -ela  triggers  final  accent 
when  attached  to  an  unaccented  verbal  form  {satos,  sas),  but  leaves  the  accent  on  a 
syllable  of  the  stem  of  lexically  accented  forms,  such  as  those  bearing  plural  l-d 
{satosie,  sane),  see  Table  33.  Verbal  forms  bearing  the  complementizer  -elako, 
have  the  accent  on  the  same  syllable  as  the  corresponding  forms  with  -ela.  That  is, 
for  accentual  purposes  the  syllable  -ko  of  this  complementizer  is  invisible. 

Table  33.  Markina:  Verbs  with  complementizers 


a.  -ela 


you-sg.  vs.  you-pl. 

bixer  satosela  esastie  'they've  told  me  that  you-sg.  are  coming 

tomorrow'  vs. 

bixer  satosiela  ~  satosela  esastie  'they've  told  me  that  you-pl.  are 

coming  tomorrow' 

etorri  sasela  ~  sarille  esastie    'they've  told  me  that  you  have-sg.  come' 

vs. 

etorri  sariela  esastie  'they've  told  me  that  you-pl.  have  come' 


b.  -elako 


you-sg.  vs.  you-pl. 

bixer  satoselako  (aserretu  de)  '(s/he  has  become  angry)  because  you- 
sg.  are  coming  tomorrow'  vs. 

bixer  satoselako  (aserretu  de)    '(s/he  has  become  angry)  because  you- 
pl.  are  coming  tomorrow' 

etorri  saselako  ~  sarilleko  'because  you-sg.  have  come'  vs. 
etorri  sarielako  'because  you-pl.  have  come' 


Nevertheless,  the  Ondarroa  option  of  leaving  the  accent  on  the  same  syllable 
as  in  the  bare  form  can  also  be  used  in  Markina  in  certain  cases,  such  as  the 
bivalent  intransitive  forms  given  in  Table  34. 


HuALDE  &  Aramaio:  Accentual  Variation  and  Convergence 
Table  34.  Bivalent  intransitive  forms  with  the  complementizer  -(e)la 


35 


Ondarroa 

Gloss 

a. 
b. 
c. 
d. 

pentzaten  dot  es  gakola  gustaten 
pentzaten  dot  es  gakoela  gustaten 
pentzaten  dot  es  gatzule  gustaten 
pentzaten  dot  es  gatzuela  gustaten 

'I  think  s/he  doesn't  like  it' 
'I  think  they  don't  like  it' 
'I  think  you-sg.  don't  like  it' 
'I  think  you-pl.  don't  like  it' 

Markina  &  Berriatua 

Gloss 

a. 
b. 
c. 
d. 

pentzetot  es  jakola  giistetan 
pentzetot  es  jakuela  gustetan 
pentzetot  es  jatzule  ~  jatzule  gustetan 
pentzetot  es  jatzuela  gustetan 

'I  think  s/he  doesn't  like  it' 
'I  think  they  don't  like  it' 
'I  think  you-sg.  don't  like  it' 
'I  think  you-pl.  don't  like  it' 

5.      Conclusion 

In  this  paper  we  have  compared  the  accentual  systems  found  in  the  region  of 
Ondarroa,  Berriatua  and  Markina,  focusing  on  aspects  of  variation.  In  the 
accentuation  of  nominals  we  find  a  high  degree  of  agreement  across  these  three 
varieties.  Lexical  accents  were  historically  shifted  to  different  syllables  in 
Ondarroa  and  Markina/Berriatua,  but  the  way  this  shift  has  interacted  with 
different  processes  of  syllable  contraction  has  tended  to  eliminate  accentual 
differences  between  the  dialects.  In  essence  (skipping  many  important  details), 
regularization  of  lexical  accents  to  the  penultimate  syllable  in  Ondarroa  took  place 
after  several  processes  of  vowel  deletion,  whereas  in  Markina/Berriatua 
regularization  to  the  antepenultimate  syllable  predates  these  processes,  some  of 
which  are  still  optional.  In  both  Markina/Berriatua  and  Ondarroa  vowel  deletion 
postdates  the  shift  from  phrase-final  to  phrase-penultimate  accent  in  lexically 
unaccented  phrases  and  produces  final  accent. 

In  verbal  forms,  on  the  other  hand,  we  find  much  greater  differences  and 
sometimes  even  opposite  patterns.  The  accentual  behavior  of  the  different  verb 
forms  and  complementizers  and  the  nature  of  both  intra-speaker  and  cross- 
dialectal  variation,  which  we  have  only  started  to  examine  here,  clearly  requires 
more  detailed  investigation. 


REFERENCES 

'Aramaio,  Itziar.  2003.  Berriatuko  azentua.  Berriatuko  hiztegitxoa.  Unpublished 

undergraduate  thesis.  Univ.  del  Pais  Vasco/Euskal  Herriko  Unib. 
Arregi,  Karlos.  2002.  Focus  on  Basque  movements.  Massachusetts  Institute  of 

Techolology,  Ph.D.  dissertation  in  Linguistics. 
.  (to  appear).  Stress  and  islands  in  Northern  Bizkaian  Basque.  In:  Hualde  & 

Lakarra  (eds.). 
Azkue,  Resurreccion  Maria  de.  1923.  Morfologia  Vasca.  Bilbao:  Euskaltzaindia. 

[Reprinted  en  3  vol.,  Bilbao,  Editorial  La  Gran  Enciclopedia  Vasca,  1969]. 
.  1931-32.  Del  acento  tonico  vasco  en  algunos  de  sus  dialectos.  Euskera 

4.282-318  &  6.3-50. 


36  Studes  in  the  Le^iguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

BORING,  Daniel,  Matthew  GORDON,  &  Cungmin  Lee  (eds.).  2003.  Topic  and 

Focus:  Papers  from  a  Workshop  on  Intonation  and  Meaning.  Dordrecht: 

Kluwer. 
Elordieta,  Gorka.  1997.  Accent,  tone  and  intonation  in  Lekeitio  Basque.  In: 

Martinez-Gil  &  Morales-Front  (eds.),  1-78. 
.  2003.  Constraints  on  intonational  prominence  of  focalized  constituents.  In: 

Biiring,  Gordon,  &  Lee  (eds.),  1-22. 
Elordieta,  Gorka,  &  Jose  I.  Hualde.  2003.  Tonal  and  durational  correlates  of 

accent  in  context  of  downstep  in  Lekeitio   Basque.  Journal  of  the 

International  Phonetic  Association  33.195-209. 
Etxebarria  Ayesta,  J.  M.  1991.  Zeberioko  euskararen  azentuaz.  In:  Lakarra 

(ed.),  611-108. 
Gaminde,  Inaki.  1998.  Euskaldunen  Azentuak.  Bilbo:  Labayru. 
GILISASTI,  Inaki.  2003.  Urduliz  Aldeko  Berba  Lapikokoa:  Lexico  del  Euskera  de 

Uribe  Kosta.  Bilbao. 
GUSSENHOVEN,  Carlos,  &  Natasha  Warner  (eds.).  2002.  Laboratory  Phonology 

7.  Berlin:  Mouton  de  Gruyter. 
Hualde,  Jose  I.  1989.  Otro  acento  vizcaino:  Getxo.  Anuario  del  Seminario  de 

Filologia  Vasca  'Julio  de  Urquijo'  23.809-17. 

.  1991.  Basque  Phonology.  London:  Routledge. 

.  1992.  Notas  sobre  el  sistema  acentual  de  Zeberio.  Anuario  del  Seminario  de 

Filologia  Vasca  'Julio  de  Urquijo'  26.767-76. 
.  1993a.  On  the  historical  origin  of  Basque  accentuation.  Diachronica  10.13- 

50. 
.   1993b.  Observaciones  acerca  de  los  sistemas  acentuales  de  la  zona 

occidental  de  Gipuzkoa.  Anuario  del  Seminario  de  Filologia  Vasca  'Julio  de 

Urquijo' 21.241-63. 
.  1995.  Anahsis  del  sistema  acentual  de  Ondarroa.  Anuario  del  Seminario  de 

Filologia  Vasca  'Julio  de  Urquijo'  29.319-33. 
.  1996.  Accentuation  and  empty  vowels  in  Ondarroa  Basque:  Against  the 

concept  of  phonological  derivation.  Lingua  99.197-206. 
.    1997.   Euskararen  azentuerak.  Donostia  &  Bilbao:  Gipuzkoako  Foru 

Aldundia  &  Euskal  Herriko  Unibertsitatea  (Supplements  of  Anuario  del 

Seminario  de  Filologia  Vasca  'Julio  de  Urquijo'  42). 

.  1999.  Basque  accentuation.  In  Hulst  (ed.),  947-93. 

.  2000.  On  system-driven  sound  change:  Accent  shift  in  Markina  Basque. 

Lingua  110.99-129. 
Hualde,  Jose  I.,  &  Xabier  Bilbao.  1992.  A  phonological  study  of  the  Basque 

dialect  of  Getxo.  Anuario  del  Seminario  de  Filologia  Vasca   'Julio  de 

Urquijo' 26.1-ni. 
.  1993.  The  prosodic  system  of  the  Basque  dialect  of  Getxo:  A  metrical 

analysis.  Linguistics  31.59-85. 
Hualde,  Jose  I.,  Gorka  Elordieta,  &  Arantzazu  Elordieta.  1993.  Focalizacion 

y  prosodia  en  vascuence  vizcaino.  Anuario  del  Seminario  de  Filologia  Vasca 

'Julio  de  Urquijo'  17.731-49. 


HUALDE  &  ARAMAIO:  ACCENTUAL  VARIATION  AND  CONVERGENCE  37 

.  1994.  The  Basque  Dialect  of  Lekeitio.  Bilbo  &  Donostia:  Univ.  del  Pais 

Vasco  &  Diputacion  Foral  de  Gipuzkoa  (Supplements  of  Anuario  del 

Seminario  de  Filologia  Vasca  'Julio  de  Urquijo'  34). 
HuALDE  Jose  I.,  Gorka  Elordieta,  Inaki  Gaminde,  &   Rajka  Smiljanic.  2002. 

From  pitch  accent  to  stress  accent  in  Western  Basque.  In:  Gussenhoven  & 

Warner  (eds.),  547-84. 
HUALDE  Jose  I.,  &  Inaki  Gaminde.  1998.  Vowel  interaction  in  Basque:  A  nearly 

exhaustive  catalogue.  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  28:1.41-77. 
HUALDE  Jose  I.,  &  Joseba  A.  Lakarra  (eds.).  (to  appear).  Studies  in  Basque  and 

Historical  Linguistics  Dedicated  to  the  Memory  of  R.  L.  Trask.  Donostia/San 

Sebastian:  Diputacion  de  Gipuzkoa  (Supplements  oiASJU). 
HuALDE,  Jose  I.,  Pello  MUGARZA,  &  Koldo  ZUAZO.  2002.  The  accentual  system 

of  Mallabia  Basque.  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32.39-56. 
HULST,  Harry  van  der  (ed.).  1999.  Word  Prosodic  Systems  in  the  Languages  of 

Europe.  Berlin:  Mouton  de  Gruyter. 
Jacobsen,  W.  1972.  Nominative-ergative  synchretism  in  Basque.  ASJU  6.67-109. 
Lakarra,  Joseba  (ed.).  1991.  Memoriae  L.  Mitxelena  Magistri  Sacrum.  Donostia: 

Diputacion  Foral  de  Gipuzkoa  (Supplements  of  Anuario  del  Seminario  de 

Filologia  Vasca  'Julio  de  Urquijo'  14). 
Mancomunidad    de    Lea-Artibai.    2004.    Lea-Artibai.     Diagnostico     de 

Sostenibilidad.  Bilbao:  Graphidaps. 
Martinez-Gil,  Fernando,  &  Alfonso  Morales-Front  (eds.).  1997.  Issues  in  the 

Phonology  and  Morphology  of  the  Major  Iberian  Languages.  Washington, 

D.C.:  Georgetown  University  Press. 
ROLLO,  William.  1925.  The  Basque  Dialect  of  Marquina.  Amsterdam:  Paris. 
ROTAETXE,  Karmele.  1978a.  L' accent  basque:  Observations  et  hypotheses.  La 

Linguistique  14.55-77. 

.  1978b.  Estudio  Estructural  del  Euskera  de  Ondarroa.  Durango:  L.  Zugaza. 

Txillardegi  [Alvarez  Enparantza,  J.L.].  1984.  Euskal  Azentuaz.  Donostia-San 

Sebastian:  Elkar. 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences 
Volume  32,  Number  2  (Fall  2002) 

KISWAHILI  NAMING  OF  DAYS  OF  THE  WEEK  IN  A  WIDER 
CONTEXT  OF  DAY  NAME  BORROWINGS* 

Aimee  Johansen 

University  of  Illinois  at  Urbana-Champaign 

alnet@uiuc.edu 

The  days  of  the  week  in  Kiswahili  are  a  combination  of  words  of  Bantu  and 
Arabic  origin.  In  standard  Kiswahili,  Saturday  through  Wednesday  are 
expressed  as  a  combination  of  the  Arabic  loan  word  juma,  literally  'week'  but 
here  used  as  'day',  and  a  number.'  After  Wednesday,  Kiswahili  uses  the  Arabic 
words  Alhamisi  and  Ijumaa  for  'Thursday'  and  'Friday',  respectively,  as  shown 
in(l). 

( 1 )     Kiswahili  words  for  the  days  of  the  week 


Word  of  Bantu 
origin^ 

Gloss 

Adaptation 
of  Arabic 
borrowing 

Gloss 

English 

Juma.mosi 

'day.one' 

Saturday 

Juma.pili 

'day.  two' 

Sunday 

Juma.tatu 

'day.three' 

Monday 

Juma.nne 

'day.four' 

Tuesday 

Juma.tano 

'day.five' 

Wednesday 

[missing: 
Juma.tundatu 
or  Juma.sita] 

Alhamisi 

'the  fifth 
day'^ 

Thursday 

[missing: 
Juma.fungate 
or  Juma.saba] 

Ijumaa 

'the  day  of 
congregation' 

Friday 

For  Kihore  (1997),  the  borrowing  of  Alhamisi  'Thursday'  into  Kiswahili 
from  Arabic  is  an  anomaly,  given  that  there  is  no  particular  importance  of  this 


'  I  would  like  to  thank  UIUC  student  Charles  LaWarre  and  one  anonymous  referee  for  suggestions  on 
this  squib.  All  mistakes  are,  of  course,  my  own. 

'  This  pattern  is  common  in  other  East  African  Bantu  languages,  with  the  exception  that  a  Bantu  word 
is  generally  used,  rather  than  juma.  One  such  example  is  Shinzwani,  a  language  classified  in  Guthrie's 
(1967-71)  classification  of  African  languages  as  a  Bantu  G40  language,  like  Kiswahili.  Shinzwani  uses 
the  word  mfumo  'week'  plus  the  numbers  'one'  through  'five'  to  form  the  words  for  Saturday  through 
Wednesday  (Ahmed-Chamanga  1997).  In  both  Kiswahili  and  Shinzwani,  this  pattern  holds  for  days 
one  through  five,  with  day  one  being  the  day  following  Friday,  which  is  the  day  of  prayer  in  Islam. 
^  The  word  juma  is  borrowed  from  Arabic.  (Its  Arabic  meaning  is  'week'.)  However,  in  Arabic,  there  is 
no  use  of  juma  plus  a  number  to  make  the  names  for  days  of  the  week. 

'  Translations  for  Alhamisi  and  Ijumaa  are  borrowed  from  Kihore  (1997).  The  Middle  Eastern  week 
calendar  system  is  numeric,  with  the  exception  of  Aj-Jumaa  'Friday'  ('the  day  of  congregation'). 
Arabic  A l-Khamiis  'Thursday'  literally  means  'the  fifth  day',  whereas  in  the  Kiswahili  calendar,  it  is 
actually  day  six  (Kihore  1997).  The  result  is  that  Kiswahili  literally  has  two  day  fives. 

©  2005  Aimee  Johansen 


40 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 


day  in  the  Muslim  week.  However,  this  borrowing  might  be  better  understood 
in  the  broader  context  of  borrowing  with  respect  to  seven-day  calendar  week 
systems.  Brown  (1989)  studied  words  for  days  of  the  week  in  145  languages  in 
cultures  that  have  a  seven-day  week,  mostly  through  diffusion  by  Christian 
groups.  For  this  reason,  there  is  a  focus  on  Sunday  as  the  day  of  worship,  rather 
than  Friday.  Brown  found  that  languages  were  most  likely  to  borrow  the  word 
for  Sunday,  followed  by  Saturday,  then  Friday  and  Monday,  and  then  the  other 
days  of  the  week.  Brown  cites  frequencies  of  words  for  the  days  of  the  week  in 
six  European  languages,  whose  speakers  have  traditionally  been  Christian,  in 
which  Sunday  was  the  most  salient  (i.e.,  frequently  referred  to)  day,  followed 
closely  by  Saturday.'* 

In  Shaba  Kiswahili  (spoken  in  the  Democratic  Republic  of  Congo), 
whose  speakers  are  mainly  Christian,  we  see  the  salience  of  Saturday  and 
Sunday  in  the  fact  that  they  do  not  follow  the  pattern  exhibited  by  the  other 
days  of  the  week,  as  demonstrated  in  (2).  In  Shaba,  Saturday  and  Sunday  are 
days  six  and  seven,  respectively,  in  contrast  to  days  six  and  seven  being 
Thursday  and  Friday  in  the  standard  Kiswahili  week. 

(2)     Days  of  the  week  in  Shaba  Kiswahili^ 


Shaba  Kiswahili 

Gloss                            English 

Shiku  ya  mposho 

'day  of  weekly  ration' 

Saturday 

Shiku  ya  mungu/yenga 

'day  of  God' 

Sunday 

Kazi  moya 

'work  one' 

Monday 

Kazi  mbiri 

'work  two' 

Tuesday 

Kazi  tarn 

'work  three' 

Wednesday 

Kazi  ine 

'work  four' 

Thursday 

Kazi  tano 

'work  five' 

Friday 

Brown's  (1989)  work  on  seven-day  week  systems  demonstrates  the 
tendency  of  languages  spoken  in  areas  where  Christianity  is  the  predominant 
religion  to  set  apart  not  only  Sunday,  but  also  Saturday,  from  the  other  days.  In 
this  context,  we  should  not  be  surprised  by  the  special  salience  of  both 
Thursday  and  Friday  in  standard  Kiswahili,  which  is  based  on  the  Kiswahili 
spoken  on  the  predominantly  Muslim  island  of  Zanzibar.  Nor  should  we  be 
surprised  by  the  resulting  adoption  of  Ijuniaa  'Friday'  and  Alhamisi  'Thursday' 
by  Kiswahili.  Thursday  would  share  in  the  cultural  salience  of  Friday  in  the 


■*  The  special  salience  of  Saturday  is  probably  increased  in  European  countries  by  the  fact  that  most 
people's  work  week  does  not  include  Saturday,  although  this  is  a  relatively  recent  phenomenon,  as 
pointed  out  by  an  anonymous  referee.  This  may  be  a  contributing  factor  in  the  languages  that  Brown 
(1989)  studies  as  well,  but  this  is  not  discussed.  The  facts  of  Shaba  Kiswahili  would  seem  to  support 
this  notion.  Unfortunately,  it  is  difficult  to  tease  apart  the  religious  importance  of  Sunday  and  the 
salience  it  lends  to  Saturday  from  the  fact  that  these  two  days  are  also  not  included  in  the  standard 
work  week  in  many  places,  even  if  this  is  a  relatively  recent  phenomenon. 

'These  are  the  names  for  the  days  of  the  week  given  in  Kapanga  (1991:321).  The  word  kazi  Is  the  word 
for  'work',  indicating  that  these  are  the  workdays.  Siku  ox  shiku  is  the  word  for  'day',  distinguishing 
Saturday  and  Sunday  from  the  workdays.  Kaji  (1985:321-2)  gives  siku  where  Kapanga  lists  kazi  in  the 
words  for  'Monday'  through  'Friday',  although  it  is  indicated  that  sikuya  kazi  'day  of  work'  is  another 
option. 


4 


Johansen:  Kiswahili  Naming  of  Days  of  the  Week  41 

same  way  that  Saturday  draws  from  the  cuhural  importance  of  Sunday  in 
predominantly  Christian  cultures. 

Indeed,  we  can  look  to  Shinzwani  (Ahmed-Chamanga  1997),  for 
evidence  of  the  salience  of  Thursday  in  a  Bantu  language.  Shinzwani,  a  Bantu 
language  spoken  on  the  predominantly  Muslim  island  of  Nzwani  (or  Anjouan) 
in  the  Comoro  Islands,  uses  Djumwa  or  Djimwa  for  Friday,  borrowed  from 
Arabic.  However,  the  native  Shinzwani  word  used  for  Thursday,  Yahoa,  is 
derived  from  the  verb  -hoa,  meaning  'wash  up'.  The  implication  is  that  the  day 
before  Friday  is  important  because  it  is  the  day  that  one  washes  up  in 
preparation  for  the  day  of  prayer.  The  special  salience  of  Thursday  and  Friday 
are  demonstrated  in  the  fact  that  they  break  from  the  pattern  that  holds  for  the 
other  days  of  the  week,  namely  the  use  of  mfumo  'week'  plus  a  number  (see 
footnote  2). 

Within  this  context  of  the  salience  of  both  the  day  of  prayer  and  the  day 
before,  both  in  Christian  cultures  and  Muslim  cultures,  we  can  better 
understand  why  Kiswahili  borrowed  both  Ijumaa  'Friday'  and  Alhamisi 
'Thursday'  from  Arabic.  In  the  seven-day  week,  both  days  six  and  seven  take 
on  special  importance. 

REFERENCES 

Ahmed-Chamanga,  Mohamed.    1997.  Dictionnaire    frangais-comorien 

(dialecte  shindzuani).  Paris:  L'Harmattan. 
Brown,  Cecil  H.  1989.  Naming  the  days  of  the  week:  A  cross-language  study 

of  lexical  acculturation.  Current  Anthropology  30.536-50. 
Guthrie,  Malcolm.  1967-71.  Comparative  Bantu:  An  Introduction  to  the 

Comparative  Linguistics  and  Prehistory  of  the  Bantu  Languages. 

Famborough:  Gregg  International  Publishers. 
KaJI,  Shigeki.  1985.  Deux  mille  phrases  de  swahili  tel  qu'il  se  parle  au  Zaire. 

(African  Languages  and  Ethnography,  XIX.)  Tokyo:  Institute  for  the 

Study  of  Languages  and  Cultures  of  Asia  and  Africa  (ILCAA). 
Kapanga,  Mwamba  Tshishiku.  1991.  Language  variation  and  change:  A  case 

study  of  Shaba  Swahili.  University  of  Illinois  at  Urbana-Champaign, 

Ph.D.  dissertation  in  Linguistics. 
KiHORE,  Yared  Magori.  1997.  Kiswahili  naming  of  the  days  of  the  week:  What 

went  wrong?  Afrikanistische  Arbeitspapiere  51.151-6. 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences 
Volume  32,  Number  2  (Fall  2002) 

ENGLISH/SPANISH  LANGUAGE  CONTACT  ON  THE  INTERNET: 
LINGUISTIC  BORROWING  OF  MANY  STRIPES 

Regina  Morin 

The  College  of  New  Jersey 

rmorin@tcnj.edu 

Spanish/English  contact  on  the  Internet  is  not  a  traditional  situation  of 
geographical  language  contact,  but  the  resulting  language  change  can 
be  analyzed  within  the  framework  of  a  traditional  analysis  of  linguistic 
borrowing.  While  English  lexical  items  are  entering  Spanish  Internet 
language  at  an  unprecedented  rate,  there  is  an  increasing  tendency  for 
Spanish  to  find  or  create,  in  a  number  of  different  ways,  expressions 
that  conform  to  Spanish  linguistic  patterns,  rather  than  continuing  to 
simply  use  English  terminology.  The  observable  results  of 
Spanish/English  language  contact  on  the  Internet  are  examined  here 
and  classified  as  loanwords,  borrowings,  loan  translations,  semantic 
caiques,  and  loan  blends. 

1.       Introduction 

Language  contact  has  generally  been  thought  of  as  the  geographical  'impinging 
of  linguistic  groups  upon  the  territory  of  other  linguistic  groups'  (Macaulay 
1982:203).  Indeed,  a  great  number  of  studies  have  considered  Spanish/English 
contact  in  the  United  States  (e.g.,  Timm  1975,  Sobin  1982,  Daiuta  1984,  Otheguy, 
Garcia  &  Fernandez  1989,  Silva-Corvalan  1994,  Toribio  2002),  French  and 
English  in  francophone  areas  of  Canada  (Poplack,  Sankoff  &  Miller,  1988;  Palmer 
&  Harris  1990,  Grant-Russell  1999),  or  Gaelic  and  English  in  Scotland  (Macaulay 
1982).  However,  Macaulay  (1982)  reminds  us  that  'some  situations  of  contact  are 
of  a  different  kind  altogether'  (1982:204).  Martin  (1998),  for  example,  examines 
French/English  language  mixing  as  it  appears  in  written  French  advertising, 
focusing  on  code-mixing  and  code-switching  in  written  material.  The  case  of 
Spanish/English  language  contact  on  the  Internet  is  another  situation  that  differs 
altogether  from  the  traditional  idea  of  geographically  motivated  language  contact 
and  change.  Soler  (1997:61),  in  discussing  the  role  of  the  Spanish  language  on 
the  Internet  writes: 

La  territorialidad  ya  no  es  el  unico  factor  vinculado  a  la  creacion  de 
espacios  culturales  y  de  comunicacion.  Estos  empiezan  a  ser 
independientes  de  los  territorios  fisicos. 

'Territoriality  is  no  longer  the  only  factor  linked  to  the  creation  of 
cultural    and    communicative    spaces.    These    are   beginning    to    be 

©  2005  Regina  Morin 


44  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

independent  of  physical  territories.' 

Spanish/English  contact  on  the  Internet,  and  the  resulting  language  change, 
defy  easy  classification  for  a  number  of  reasons.  Fu^t,  this  is  not  a  traditional 
geographical  situation  of  language  contact,  and  it  is  not  at  all  clear  that  we  are 
dealing  with  a  traditional  bilingual  speech  community.  In  addition,  EngUsh  lexical 
items  are  entering  Spanish  Internet  language  at  an  unprecedented  rate,  but  in 
different  ways.  For  example, /«?e/72er,  raton  'mouse',  and  salvapantallas  'screen 
saver'  are  all  lexical  items  that  are  commonly  used  in  Spanish  to  talk  about 
computers  and  the  Internet,  but  each  is  a  borrowing  of  a  different  type.  Finally, 
while  some  borrowings  are  clearly  already  undergoing  integration  into  the 
Spanish  language,  even  appearing  in  Spanish  language  dictionaries,  others  are 
still  very  clearly  flagged  as  foreign  items.  Such  flagging  can  be  carried  out 
through  the  maintenance  of  source  language  orthography  or  accentuation,  the 
use  of  quotation  marks  or  italics,  or  some  kind  of  metalinguistic  commentary 
(Grant-Russell  1999). 

2.      Language  in  cyberspace 

There  is  nascent  interest  in  what  Timofeeva  (2001:199)  calls  'the  linguistic  issue 
[of]  language  in  cyberspace....',  accompanied  by  a  still  small  body  of  research  on 
different  aspects  of  the  subject.  Soler  (1997)  laments  what  he  sees  as  a  patrimonial 
reticence  with  respect  to  the  diffusion  of  Spanish  and  Hispanic  language  and 
culture  on  the  Internet.  He  points  to  the  fact  that  85%  of  Latino  content  servers 
were  in  the  United  States  at  the  time  of  writing,  and  that  a  large  part  of  the 
Spanish  language  presence  on  the  Web  is  due  to  private  rather  than  corporate  or 
institutional  initiatives.  In  a  more  optimistic  vein,  Piiiol  (1999)  analyzes  some 
recent  lexical  innovations  in  Spanish  Internet  language,  and  points  out  that  there 
is  an  increasing  tendency  for  Spanish  to  find  or  create  expressions  that  conform 
to  Spanish  linguistic  patterns,  rather  than  continuing  to  simply  use  English 
terminology.  Piiiol  (2000)  explores  the  usefulness  of  Spanish  language  e-mail, 
discussion  lists  and  web  sites  for  the  Spanish  FL  classroom.  Timofeeva  (2001) 
examines  Russian  Internet  language  and  details  many  Hnguistic  innovations  that 
are  leading  to  the  establishing  of  a  new  cyber-  or  hybridized  Web  language.  She 
argues  that  the  influence  of  a  global  network  with  its  computer  terminology  in 
EngUsh,  and  Web-texts  standards  based  on  new  units  and  models  of  language 
has  created  a  new  Web  language  in  Russian  that  lies  somewhere  between 
'classical  hterary  language',  on  the  one  hand,  and  'plain  or  street  language',  on 
the  other. 

Many  of  the  innovations  Timofeeva  identifies  in  Russian  Internet  language 
can  also  be  found  in  Spanish  Internet  language.  Such  innovations  include  a  lack 
of  traditional  punctuation,  or  special  web  usage  of  traditional  punctuation.  Some 
examples  in  Spanish  can  be  found  at  http://www.nazcanet.com/e-jobs/,  where  the 
advertising  banner  with  the  message  Ya  no  es  .complicado  'It's  not  so 
.complicated  anymore'  incorporates  the  dot  com  (.com)  extension  as  part  of  the 
word  complicado,  or  at  http://www.enel.net/rumbodiario/,  where  the  name  of  the 
site  is  enelpunt%net,  and  punto  appears  only  as  a  period  (dot)  in  the  URL. 


Morin:  English/Spanish  Language  Contact  on  the  Internet  45 

Another  characteristic  of  Russian  Internet  language  is  a  greater  hnguistic  freedom 
in  speUing,  such  as  a  specialized  use  of  capital  letters.  An  example  of  this  in 
Spanish  is  found  at  http://www.tuGUeb.com,  described  as  the  portal  or  website 
for  Gaceta  Universitaria,  a  web  publication  directed  at  a  young  pubhc  in  general, 
and  at  university  students  in  particular.  In  addition  to  the  graphic  manipulation  of 
capital  letters  that  connects  the  web  address  to  the  name  of  the  publication,  this 
particular  URL  disregards  Spanish  spelling  conventions.  The  graphemic 
combinations  <gue>  and  <gui>  in  Spanish  are  pronounced  /ge/  and  /gi/.  They  are 
pronounced  /gue/  and  /gui/  only  when  spelled  with  the  umlaut  as  in  vergiienza 
'shame'  or  linguista  'linguist',  but  there  is  no  doubt  that  this  web  site  is  called 
/tu-giieb/  'your  Web',  a  pronunciation  that  reflects  a  common  allophonic 
variation  of /w/  (e.g.,  hueso  'bone'  can  be  pronounced  [we-so]  or  [gue-so],  where 
[w]  is  the  voiced  bilabial  spht-fricative  consonant,  often  allophonically 
strengthened  to  [g],  and  [u]  is  a  high  back  ghde).  In  the  area  of  lexis,  some 
innovations  in  Russian  Internet  language  include  the  use  of  current  keywords  as 
a  basis  for  word  formation  (e.g.,  Hhtcphct  'Internet' >  HHTcpHCTHsaLtHH 
'Intemetization'),  compounding  (e.g.,  HHTepHcx-KynbTypa  'Internet  culture'), 
blendings  such  as  CcTHKex  'netiquette',  based  on  Cctb  'net'  +  Sthkct 
'etiquette',  and  semantic  neologisms,  whereby  an  existing  word  acquires  a  new 
web  meaning  that  differs  from  its  standard  meaning.  In  Spanish  Internet  language, 
in  addition  to  the  widespread  use  of  blendings  based  on  international  (English) 
Internet  vocabulary  found  in  Russian  Internet  language,  there  are  certain  loan 
blends  that  are  specific  to  Spanish  language  web  sites,  such  as  those  found  on  the 
Ecuadorian  server  http://www4.ecua.net.ee/,  which  makes  abundant  use  of  links 
such  as  ecuapaging,  ecuaforos,  ecuachat,  and  ecuacards.  Other  blends  are 
strictly  Spanish,  such  as  publitotal  from  publicidad  'advertising'+  total,  part  of 
the  name  of  a  Uruguayan  server  (UruguayTotal.com). 

3.       Language  contact  in  cyberspace:  A  case  of  code-switching? 

One  language  contact  phenomenon  that  has  been  explored  in  great  detail  is 
code-switching,  described  by  Timm  (1975:473)  as: 

that  preeminently  biUngual  mode  of  communication  characterized  by 
frequent  shifts  from  one  language  to  the  other,  (typically  without 
phonological  interference)  throughout  the  flow  of  natural 
conversation. 

While  many  language  contact  situations  can  be  analyzed  in  terms  of  code- 
switching  vs.  borrowing,  I  would  argue  that  such  is  not  the  case  for 
Spanish/English  contact  on  the  Internet.  One  reason  is  that  the  motivations  for 
code-switching  are  largely  extralinguistic,  and  that  code-switching  serves  as  a 
device  for  indicating  personal  feehngs,  as  a  response  to  the  speaker's  assessment 
of  his  or  her  interlocutor  on  various  levels,  or  as  a  reflection  of  ethnic  identity 
(Timm  1975,  Toribio  2002).  The  use  of  EngUsh  in  Spanish  language  Internet  texts, 
on  the  other  hand,  answers  to  a  much  narrower  necessity,  and  can  more  fruitfully 
;be  considered  a  case  of  transfer,  that  serves  as  'a  means  of  correcting  the 
inadequacies  of  a  lexicon'  (Weinreich  1967:31).  A  further  consideration  is  that 


46  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

code-switching  is  traditionally  found  and  analyzed  in  spoken  language  (cf. 
Martin  1998).  Poplack,  Sankoff  &  Miller  (1988)  use  a  complex  set  of  criteria  to 
argue  that  it  is  possible  to  distinguish  between  single-word  switches  and  single- 
word  borrowings  in  the  speech  of  bilinguals,  while  Otheguy,  Garcia  &  Fernandez 
(1989)  make  this  distinction  based  solely  on  phonological  integration  of  single- 
word  items:  single  word  switches  in  the  speech  of  the  Cuban  Americans 
participating  in  their  study  preserve  English  phonology,  while  single-word 
borrowings  are  phonologically  integrated  into  Spanish.  While  the  phonological 
aspect  of  language  contact  is  central  to  virtually  all  existing  research  on  both 
code-switching  and  other  contact  phenomena  (cf.  Grant-Russell  1999), 
communication  on  the  Internet  is  accomplished  primarily  through  written  means 
(even  in  chat  rooms  and  through  instant  messaging),  so  it  is  extremely  difficult  to 
establish  the  level  of  phonological  integration  of  English  items,  single-  or  multiple- 
word,  that  appear  in  Spanish  Internet  language.  Even  so,  it  seems  safe  to  assume 
that,  as  in  other  cases  of  linguistic  borrowing,  phonological  integration  of  English 
terms  used  in  Spanish  language  Internet  texts  becomes  more  complete  as  the 
social  integration  of  the  loanword  proceeds,  and  that  phonological  integration  is 
in  part  a  function  of  the  bilingual  ability  of  the  speaker  (Haugen  1950;  Poplack, 
Sankoff  &  Miller  1988).  Monolingual  Spanish  speakers  or  those  with  low 
proficiency  in  English  most  likely  show  a  strong  tendency  to  assimilate  Internet 
language  borrowings  into  Spanish  phonology  while  more  proficient  English 
speakers  tend  to  assimilate  less  to  Spanish  phonological  patterns.  A  fmal 
consideration  is  that  Spanish  Internet  language  is  global  by  its  very  nature,  and 
cannot  be  analyzed  as  the  mode  of  communication  of  any  specific  language 
community.  Therefore,  as  implied  above,  producers  and  consumers  of  Spanish 
Internet  language  probably  include  English/Spanish  bilinguals  as  well  as 
monoUngual  Spanish  speakers.  Code-switching  by  definition  is  a  linguistic 
behavior  found  among  bilingual  speakers.  On  the  other  hand,  in  the  case  of 
linguistic  borrowing,  it  is  a  bihngual  speaker  who  introduces  a  new  loanword,  but 
once  the  loanword  gains  a  certain  currency  in  the  host  language  it  will  be  picked 
up  and  used  even  by  the  monolingual  speaker  as  the  borrowed  item  loses  its 
status  as  a  foreign  word  (Haugen  1950).  Myers  Scotton  (1990),  following 
Gibbons  (1987:70)  points  out  that  borrowing  typically  requires  only  a 
monolingual  competence.  The  observed  results  of  Spanish/EngHsh  contact  on  the 
Internet  can  be  more  accurately  described  in  terms  of  linguistic  borrowings  of 
various  kinds,  rather  than  as  a  situation  of  code-switching. 

4.       Contact  phenomena:  linguistic  borrovdngs  of  many  stripes 

According  to  Weinreich  (1967)  the  most  common  form  of  borrowing  is  the 
outright  transfer  of  single-word  items  or  unanalyzed  compounds  from  one 
language  to  another,  resulting  in  a  loanword.  The  term  loanword  is  used  in  this 
sense  in  much  of  the  research  on  language  contact.  For  Daiuta  (1984)  loanwords 
result  when  speakers  transfer  both  form  and  content  from  the  source  language  to 
the  recipient  language,  with  concomitant  phonological  and  morphological 
adaptation  (e.g.,  Spanish  lonchar  from  'to  have  lunch';  troca  or  troque  from 
'truck').  Otheguy,   Garcia  &  Fernandez   (1989)  call  these  simply  single-word 


Morin:  English/Spanish  Language  Contact  on  the  Internet  47 

borrowings  (as  opposed  to  single- word  switches),  and  in  Silva-Corvalan's  (1994) 
terminology,  they  are  single-word  loans.  Poplack,  Sankoff  &  Miller  (1988:52) 
make  a  distinction  between  lexical  borrowing  on  the  one  hand,  and  loanwords  on 
the  other: 

Lexical  borrowing  involves  the  incorporation  of  individual  L2  words 
(or  compounds  functioning  as  single  words)  into  discourse  of  LI,  the 
host  or  recipient  language,  usually  phonologically  and 
morphologically  adapted  to  conform  with  the  patterns  of  that 
language,  and  occupying  a  sentence  slot  dictated  by  its  syntax.  The 
status  "loanword",  however,  is  traditionally  conferred  only  on  words 
which,  in  addition,  recur  relatively  frequently,  are  widely  used  in  the 
speech  community,  and  have  achieved  a  certain  level  of  recognition  or 
acceptance,  if  not  normative  approval... 

Palmer  and  Harris  appear  to  make  the  same  distinction,  and  refer  to  integration,  or 
'the  acceptance  of  a  word  or  phrase  originating  in  another  language  by  a 
language  community  as  part  of  its  language'  (1990:81). 

The  loanword  is  not  only  the  most  common  form  of  linguistic  borrowing.  It 
is  also  the  only  observed  result  of  borrowing  that  can  be  defined  more  or  less 
straightforwardly  based  on  the  existing  hterature.  Otheguy,  Garcia  &  Fernandez 
(1989:43)  summarize  the  problem: 

The  study  of  modeUng,  which  Weinreich  defined  as  the  use  of  the 
influenced  language's  own  elements  in  a  manner  that  replicates,  or 
models,  features  of  the  influencing  language,  is  beset  with 
terminological  and  conceptual  difficulties.  The  terms  caique,  semantic 
loan,  semantic  extension,  loan  shift,  and  loan  translation  have  all  been 
in  circulation  for  many  decades,  aU  referring  essentially  to  the  same 
modeling  phenomenon. 

The  problem  is  actually  more  complicated,  since  these  terms  appear  to  describe  the 
same  thing,  when  really,  they  do  not.  Both  loan  translation  and  caique  are 
generally  defined  as  the  transferring  of  meaning  without  forms,  or  as  'the  transfer 
of  language  X  content  alone,  using  the  forms  of  language  Y  to  render  the 
content'  (Daiuta  1984:72).  However,  an  important  distinction  is  missing.  If  we 
look  at  the  examples  in  Haugen  (1950)  and  Weinreich  (1967),  it  becomes 
apparent  that  a  loan  translation  creates  a  new  lexical  item  in  the  recipient 
language  to  refer  to  a  previously  unnamed  item  or  concept,  for  example,  when 
Spanish  uses  the  words  rasca+cielos  to  render  the  same  meaning  as  the  English 
forms  'sky'-(-'scraper'.  Weinrich  (1967:50)  considers  the  loan  translation  to  be  a 
'reproduction  in  terms  of  equivalent  native  words',  where  the  model  can  be 
reproduced  exactly  (Spanish  rascacielos  from  EngUsh  'skyscraper'),  or  less 
exactly  (a  loan  rendition  such  as  German  Wolkenkratzer  'cloud  scraper'  from 
English  'skyscraper'),  or  where  a  new  coinage  is  created  based  on  a  stimulus  in 
the  model  language  (a  loan  creation,  for  example,  Yiddish  mitkind  (literally 
'fellow  child'),  based  on  English  'sibling').  The  use  of  the  label  'caique'  in 
Otheguy,  Garcia  &  Fernandez  (1989),  and  Silva-Corvalan  (1994)  captures  the 


48  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

difference  between  a  caique  and  a  loan  translation.  Silva-Corvalan  defines  single- 
word  caiques  as: 

the  transferring  of  meanings  into  an  already  existing  lexical  item  (e.g., 
parientes  'relatives'  extends  its  meaning  to  incorporate  the  meaning 
of  English  pare«/5...)  (1994:  171) 

Silva-Corvalan  gives  other  examples  such  as  aplicacion  'application'  in  the 
sense  of  making  a  request  (Spanish  solicitud),  grados,  for  school  'grades' 
(Spanish  notas),  and  carpeta  for  'carpet'  (Spanish  alfombra  or  moqueta).  These 
examples  clearly  point  out  the  difference  between  a  loan  translation  and  a  caique. 
A  loan  translation  creates  a  new  lexical  item,  whereas  a  caique  transfers  a  foreign 
meaning  onto  an  already  existing  lexical  item.  This  use  of  the  term  caique  appears 
to  coincide  with  Haugen's  (1950)  semantic  loan,  in  which  no  formal  structural 
elements  are  transferred,  only  meaning,  and  the  new  meaning  is  the  only  visible 
evidence  of  borrowing. 

The  last  term  that  is  of  import  here  is  loan  blend,  described  by  Haugen 
(1950:214)  as  a  word  where  'only  part  of  the  phonemic  shape  of  the  word  has 
been  imported,  while  a  native  portion  has  been  substituted  for  the  rest'.  Haugen 
gives  the  example  of  Pennsylvania  German  [blaumSpai],  based  on  American 
English  'plum  pie'.  Here  the  speaker  analyzed  the  compound  into  its  constituent 
morphemes,  and  made  a  partial  substitution. 

5.       The  current  study 

To  compile  the  lists  of  lexical  items  analyzed  in  this  study,  I  consulted  a  large 
number  of  Spanish  language  servers,  online  newspapers  and  dictionaries.  See 
Appendix  A  for  a  complete  listing  of  servers  and  websites  consulted.  The  home 
pages,  navigating  and  clicking  words,  privacy  policies,  legal  notices,  terms  of 
service,  FAQ's,  and  e-mail  and  chat  registration  forms  from  servers  based  in  Spain 
and  nine  Spanish-speaking  countries  in  Latin  America  yielded  many  examples  of 
linguistic  borrowing.  I  repeatedly  consulted  thirty  onHne  newspapers  from  Spain 
and  countries  in  Latin  America,  most  of  which  are  also  published  in  print,  and 
found  that  many  have  sections  dedicated  to  science,  technology,  and  the  Internet, 
which  also  make  use  of  many  borrowed  lexical  items.  However,  some  Internet- 
related  lexical  items  are  undergoing  a  certain  degree  of  integration  and  diffusion 
beyond  the  Internet,  and  have  achieved  word  list  status.  In  addition,  such  lexical 
items  are  not  relegated  only  to  special  technology  sections,  but  are  finding  their 
way  into  front  page  news  items,  as  seen  in  the  following  examples: 

(1)      a.       El  vertiginoso   ascenso  del  precandidato   democrata   Howard 
Dean  es  un  buen  ejemplo  de  como  hacer  "ruido"  en  Internet. 
'The  meteoric  rise  of  the  democratic  candidate  Howard  Dean  is  a 
good  example  of  how  to  make  "noise"  on  the  Internet'. 
(http://www.clarin.com/diario/2003/07/ll/t-587348.htm) 

b.  En  los  ultimos  anos,  Google.com  se  ha  convertido  en  el 
buscador  de  Internet  mas  popular  en  el  mundo,  y  es  que 
regularmente  da  excelentes  resultados  si  sabes  buscar  bien. 


Morin:  English/Spanish  Language  Contact  on  the  Internet  49 

Pues  bien,  Google  fue  hackeada.... 

'In  recent  years,   Google.com  has   become   the   most  popular 

Internet   search   engine   in  the   world,   and   it  regularly    gives 

excellent  results  if  you  know  how  to  do  a  good  search.  Well, 

Google  was  hacked...' 

(http://www.cnienlinea.com.mx/notas/61_4707.html) 

c.  Sin  embargo,  en  este  caso  pocos  son  los  que  se  atreven  a 
recurrir  a  las  autoridades  federates  ya  que,  como  senalo  uno 
de  los  "webmasters"  a  la  revista  "Wired" ... 
'However,  in  these  cases  few  dare  to  go  to  the  federal  authorities, 
as  was  pointed  out  by  one  of  the  webmasters  for  the  magazine 
Wired...' 
(http://www.abc.es). 

In  what  follows,  the  observable  results  of  Spanish/English  language  contact 
on  the  Internet  will  be  examined  and  classified  using  the  following  terms,  defined 
in  the  preceding  section:  loanwords,  borrowing,  loan  translation,  semantic  caique, 
and  loan  blend. 

5.1.    Loanwords 

If  following  Poplack,  Sankoff  &  Miller  (1988)  we  use  dictionary  attestations  as 
one  gauge  of  acceptance  of  a  linguistic  borrowing,  a  number  of  forms  can  already 
be  classified  as  loanwords.  Technically,  only  accepted  borrowings  are  loanwords, 
but  a  number  of  loan  translations  and  semantic  caiques  have  also  recently 
achieved  word  list  status.  A  comparison  of  the  twenty-first  print  edition  of  the 
Diccionario  de  la  Lengua  Espanola  (Real  Academia  Espafiola  1992)  and  the 
twenty-second  edition  (2001)  that  appears  online  gives  an  idea  of  how  rapidly 
some  Internet  terminology  is  becoming  integrated  into  the  Spanish  language  as  a 
whole.  The  online  version,  which  like  all  previous  print  editions  has  been 
compiled  with  the  collaboration  of  sister  Academias  in  Latin  America,  North 
America  and  the  Philippines,  has  added  10,000  new  lexical  items,  more  than 
24,000  new  acceptations,  and  more  than  3,000  phrases  and  expressions.  Only 
two  of  the  forms  {raton  'mouse'  and  disco  duro  'hard  drive')  that  appear  in  the 
twenty-second  edition  online  appear  in  the  print  edition  from  1992.  This  means 
that  most  of  the  items  that  have  attained  word  list  status  have  done  so  roughly  in 
the  last  ten  years.  The  terms  that  appear  in  the  twenty-second  edition  of  the 
Diccionario  de  la  Lengua  Espanola  follow: 

(2)     a.       Fully  accepted  borrowings:  ciberespacio,   hardware,   software, 
die,  hypertexto,  web,  modem,  pixel; 

b.  Loan  translations:  buzon  electronico  'electronic  mailbox', 
correo  electronico  'e-mail',  disco  duro  'hard  drive',  pdgina  web 
'web  page'; 

c.  Semantic  caiques:  (anti)virus,  ventana  'window',  navegar 
'browse',  aplicacion  '(web)  application',  raton  'mouse'. 

The  terms  {anti)virus,  ciberespacio,    hardware,    software,    modem,  pixel. 


50  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

correo  electronico,  disco  duro,  and  ventana  also  appear  in  the  Diccionario 
General  de  la  Lengua  Espanola  VOX  online  (Spes  Editorial  2000).  Some 
loanwords  show  clear  (but  inconsistent)  signs  of  integration  into  Spanish  through 
regular  morphological  processes,  or  through  phonological  and  orthographic 
assimilation  to  Spanish.  The  definitions  of  hardware  and  software  in  the 
Diccionario  General  de  la  Lengua  Espanola  VOX  online  also  include  the 
information  'Se  pronuncia  yarJwer',  and  'Se  pronuncia  softuer  ,  giving  us  some 
idea  of  the  phonological  adaptation  that  the  terms  are  undergoing.  In  this 
dictionary,  the  words  modem  and  pixel  appear  with  no  written  accent,  but  they 
appear  as  modem  and  pixel  in  the  online  Diccionario  de  la  Lengua  Espanola 
(Real  Academia  Espanola  2001),  and  on  a  regular  basis,  as  modem,  pixel,  and 
pixeles,  also  with  a  written  accent  and  with  a  plural  form  that  conforms  to 
Spanish  patterns  of  plural  word  formation  (-5  if  the  word  ends  in  a  vowel,  -es  if  it 
ends  in  a  consonant)  in  the  advertising  section  of  the  print  edition  of  the  Spanish 
newspaper  El  Pais.  On  many  websites  we  find  the  word  click,  which  appears  as 
haz  click,  haga  click  or  hace  click,  depending  on  the  dialectal  variation  involved, 
with  the  Enghsh  spelling,  or  as  die,  with  a  simplification  of  the  EngUsh  <ck> 
orthographic  cluster.  In  still  other  cases,  the  command  forms  clique  aqui  'click 
here'  or  cliquea  aqui  (http://www.ahijuna.com.ar/info/herramientas/)  are  attested, 
with  standard  Spanish  orthography  even  though  there  is  no  verb  form  clicar  or 
cliquear  in  the  1992  print  edition  of  the  Diccionario  de  la  Lengua  EspaHola,  the 
2001  online  edition,  or  the  2000  Diccionario  General  de  la  Lengua  Espanola 
VOX  online. 

5.2.    Unintegrated  borrowing 

Borrowing,  as  we  have  seen,  is  the  outright  transfer  of  both  form  and  content  of 
single-word  items  or  unanalyzed  compounds.  In  Spanish  Internet  language, 
though  not  in  Spanish  in  general,  this  definition  must  be  extended  to  include  the 
use  of  abbreviation  by  initials.  Piiiol  (1999)  points  out  that  normally  in  Spanish, 
abbreviation  by  initials  will  reflect  Spanish  word  order,  for  example,  IMF 
(International  Monetary  Fund)  in  Enghsh,  but  FMI  {Fondo  Monetario 
Internacional)  in  Spanish.  However,  this  does  not  happen  in  Spanish  Internet 
language,  where  English  word  order  is  maintained  in  abbreviation  by  initials. 
Pinol  offers  many  examples  of  this,  including: 

(3)  a.       FTP  not  PTF  {Protocolo  de  Transferencia  de  Ficheros) 

b.  HTML  not  LMHT  (Lenguaje  de  Marcado  de  HiperTexto) 

c.  URL  not  LUR  {Localizador  Universal  de  Recursos) 

Pinol  also  includes  a  listing  of  blendings  such  as  ciberespacio  which  are 
phonologically  adapted  to  Spanish,  but  maintain  English  word  order.  These  must 
also  be  considered  borrowings,  since  it  appears  that  the  blending  takes  place  in 
EngUsh,  and  then  the  unanalyzed  blended  form  is  transferred  to  Spanish  in  both 
form  and  content.  This  would  explain  why  Enghsh  word  order  is  maintained. 
Some  of  these  include: 

(4)  a.       ciberespacio  'cyberspace'  from  'cybernetic  space' 


Morin:  English/Spanish  Language  Contact  on  the  Internet  51 

b.  e-mail  from  'electronic  mail' 

c.  emoticon  'emoticon'  from  'emotional  icon' 

Some  of  the  more  common  borrowings  that  appear  on  Spanish  language 
servers  and  web  sites  are  listed  below.  None  of  these  appear  in  the  Diccionario 
de  la  Lengua  Espahola  1992  print  edition,  the  2001  online  edition,  or  the  2000 
Diccionario  General  de  la  Lengua  Espanola  VOX  online.  For  a  more  complete 
listing,  see  Appendix  B. 

(5)  banners 
cookies 
chat 

click/clic  (doble  clic 
hacker/hacking 
home/home-page 
(la)  Internet 
links 
login 

messenger 
online 

spam/spamming/anti-spam 
World  Wide  Web 

It  is  curious  to  note  that  the  word  Internet,  which  appears  even  in  scholarly 
publications  in  Spanish  (Soler  1997,  Piiiol  1999,  2000),  is  not  listed  in  the 
dictionary. 

The  borrowings  that  appear  here  are  used  on  any  number  of  web  sites,  but 
very  often  they  are  flagged  as  foreign  terms  in  some  way.  This  appears  to  be,  at 
times  a  function  of  the  website,  and  at  others,  a  function  of  the  word.  For 
example,  the  Spanish  print  newspaper  ABC  is  known  to  be  politically 
conservative,  and  to  use  a  quite  formal  style  of  language.  In  the  legal  notice  of  the 
online  edition  (http://www.abc.es),  many  borrowed  terms  are  flagged  as  foreign, 
and  some  doubly  so  through  the  use  of  quotation  marks  as  well  as  metalinguistic 
commentary  (e.g.,  mediante  la  tecnica  denominada  "framing"  'through  the 
technique  called  "framing"',  mediante  la  tecnica  denominada  "in  line  linking" 
'through  the  technique  called  "in  line  linking'").  In  other  cases,  it  appears  that  it 
is  the  term  itself  that  leads  to  flagging.  Some  terms  such  as  'cookies'  are  so 
unassimilated  that  they  even  lead  to  some  confusion  in  the  assignment  of  gender. 
For  example,  in  their  privacy  policies,  many  websites  such  as 
http://www.bacan.com  refer  to  una  cookie  and  las  cookies  (fem.),  but 
http://www.univision.com  refers  to  the  feminine  una  "cookie"  o  galleta,  and  in 
the  same  paragraph,  to  masculine  plural  estos  "cookies".  The  privacy  policy  of 
Clarin,  an  Argentinean  print  and  online  newspaper  (http://www.clarin.com), 
informs  readers  that: 

Los  Cookies  [masc]  son  pequehas  piezas  de  informacion 
transferidas  por  el  sitio  Web  'cookies  are  small  pieces  of  information 
transferred  by  the  Website...' 


52  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

Poplack,  Sankoff  &  Miller  (1988)  found  that  gender  assignment  is  made  very 
consistently  quite  early  in  the  process  of  integration,  so  we  can  assume  that  terms 
like  'cookies'  have  been  borrowed  into  Spanish  Internet  language,  but  are 
nowhere  near  being  considered  as  part  of  the  lexical  stock  of  the  majority  of 
Spanish  speakers. 

In  many  cases  borrowed  items  are  used  along  with  Spanish  terms  that 
denote  the  same  thing.  For  example,  on  the  home  page  for  http://www.ozu.es,  the 
message  is  'Estas  en:  Home',  but  on  other  pages  the  link  to  return  to  the  home 
page  is  Ozu  pagina  de  inicio.  At  http://www.mexicoglobaI.com/pagina_inicio/  the 
following  message  appears: 

Si  utiliza  otro  browser  elija  el  navegador  (browser)  que  estd 
utilizando  actualmente  para  recibir  instrucciones.  'If  you  use 
another  browser  choose  the  browser  that  you  currently  use  to  receive 
instructions.' 

Likewise,  the  term  correo  electronico  and  'e-mail'  are  used  interchangeably  on 
many  web  sites.  On  http://www.ozu.es,  the  user  is  directed  to  chequear  tu  correo 
'check  your  mail'  or  follow  the  command  accede  a  tu  correo  'access  your  mail', 
but  if  the  user  does  not  have  an  account,  in  order  to  create  a  user  profile  it  is 
necessary  to  provide  an  alternate  e-mail  address  or  mail  altemativo,  where  one 
can  be  notified  upon  receiving  a  message: 

Selecciona  "Activa  Notificacion"  si  deseas  recibir  un  aviso  en  tu 
mail  alternativo  cada  vez  que  recibas  un  e-mail.  'Choose  "Activate 
Notification"  if  you  want  to  receive  notification  through  your 
alternate  e-mail  address  every  time  you  receive  an  e-mail.' 

While  many  borrowings  are  still  marked  as  foreign,  others  are  already 
showing  signs  of  integration  into  Spanish  through  regular  morphological 
processes.  The  borrowing  chat,  for  example,  exists  as  a  related  noun  form,  chateo, 
and  as  a  verb,  chatear.  The  borrowed  form  hacker  habitually  appears  even  in 
news  items,  and  has  a  number  of  related  forms,  including  related  nouns  and 
conjugated  verbs,  as  seen  in  the  following  examples: 

(6)     a.       Detienen  a  un  hacker... 
'a  hacker  was  arrested...' 
(http://www.clarin.com/diario/hoy/umym-587829.htm) 

b.  Un  hombre  de  31  ahos  hacked... 
'A  31  year  old  man  hacked...' 
(http://www.clarin.com/diario/hoy/um/m-587829.htm) 

c.  Una  hackeadita  a  Google 
'a  little  hacking  at  Google' 
(http://www.cnienlinea.com.mx/notas/61_4707.html) 

d.  Google  fue  hackeada... 
'Google  was  hacked...' 
(http://www.cnienlinea.com.mx/notas/61_4707.html) 


Morin:  English/Spanish  Language  Contact  on  the  Internet  53 

e.  El  hackeofue  hecho  por  un  ingles... 

'the  hacking  was  done  by  an  Englishman...' 
(http://www.cnienUnea.com.mx/notas/61_4707.html) 

f.  Ademds  de  esta  busqueda  hackeada,  existe  otra... 
'In  addition  to  this  hacked  search,  there  is  another...' 
(http://www.cnienlinea.com.mx/notas/61_4707.html). 

To  summarize,  what  is  clear  is  that  among  these  borrowings,  there  are 
degrees  of  integration.  On  one  end  of  the  scale,  the  borrowed  form  Internet  does 
not  appear  in  the  dictionary,  but  it  does  regularly  appear  in  news  items  and  in 
scholarly  writing  (Soler  1997,  Pinol  1999,  2000),  and  is  very  seldom  flagged  as 
foreign.  In  addition,  it  is  always  feminine  {la  Internet)  when  it  is  assigned  gender. 
This  consistency  in  gender  assignment  indicates  that  it  already  has  a  certain 
currency  in  the  word  stock  of  many  Spanish  speakers.  In  the  middle  are 
expressions  like  chat  and  hacker  that  have  undergone  morphological 
innovations.  And  at  the  other  extreme  are  the  many  expressions  like  cookies  that 
are  still  considered  quite  foreign  and  are  habitually  flagged  as  such  through 
orthography,  the  use  of  quotation  marks  or  italics,  or  some  kind  of  metalinguistic 
commentary,  alone  or  in  combination. 

5.3.   Loan  translations 

As  explained  above,  a  loan  translation  here  means  the  use  of  Spanish  forms  to 
render  the  content  of  English,  thereby  creating  a  new  lexical  item  in  Spanish.  All 
the  items  that  appear  here  were  created  to  name  Internet  related  things  and 
concepts  that  were  previously  unnamed  in  Spanish.  A  fuller  listing  can  be  found 
in  Appendix  B,  but  a  representative  sample  appears  below: 

(7)     archivos  adjuntos  'attachments' 
barra  de  herramientas  'tool  bar' 
correo  electronico  'e-mail' 
corrector  ortografico  'spell  check' 
disco  duro  'hard  drive' 
espacio  cibemetico  'cyberspace' 
hipervinculos  'hyperlinks' 
mapa  del  sitio  'sitemap' 

mensaje/mensajeria  instantaneo/a  'instant  message/messaging' 
pancartas  publicitarias  'banners' 
periodico  electronico  'online  newspaper' 
pirata  informatico  'hacker' 
programacion  de  terceros  'branded  programming' 
salvapantallas  'screen  saver' 

As  indicated  above,  buzon  electronico,  correo  electronico,  disco  duro,  and 
pdgina  web  already  appear  in  the  2001  online  edition  of  the  Diccionario  de  la 
Lengua  Espahola  (Real  Academia  Espaiiola),  disco  duro  appears  in  the  1992 
print  edition,  and  correo  electronico  and  disco  duro,  appear  in  the  2000 
Diccionario  General  de  la  Lengua  Espahola  VOX  online. 


54  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

5.4.   Semantic  caiques 

Recall  that  a  semantic  caique  involves  the  transfer  only  of  meaning,  and  the  new 
meaning  is  the  only  visible  evidence  of  borrowing  (Haugen  1950).  So  in  all  the 
examples  that  follow,  no  new  lexical  items  are  created,  but  lexical  items  that 
already  existed  in  Spanish  have  acquired  a  new  meaning,  copied  or  calqued  from 
English  lexical  items.  In  the  case  of  those  that  already  appear  in  the  dictionary,  it 
is  easy  to  see  that  existing  words  have  taken  on  new  meaning.  For  example,  in 
the  1992  print  edition  of  the  Diccionario  de  la  lengua  espanola,  the  word 
ventana  'window'  is  defined  as  'the  elevated  opening  left  in  a  wall  for 
ventilation  and  light;  the  pieces  of  wood  and  glass  used  to  close  such  an  opening; 
each  opening  in  the  nose'.  None  of  its  related  figurative  expressions  refers  to 
information  technology.  In  the  2001  online  edition  of  the  dictionary,  ventana  has 
the  same  definitions  as  before,  in  addition  to  a  new  meaning: 

Espacio  delimitado  en  la  pantalla  de  un  ordenador,  cuyo  contenido 
puede  manejarse  independientemente  del  resto  de  la  pantalla  'A 
delimited  area  on  a  computer  screen,  whose  content  can  be 
manipulated  independently  of  the  rest  of  the  screen'. 

Likewise,  navegar  'navigate'  has  the  meanings: 

'to  travel  by  water  on  a  ship  or  vessel;  to  make  the  ship  or  vessel  move 
forward;  by  analogy,  to  travel  by  air  in  a  balloon,  airplane  or  other 
vehicle', 

in  addition  to  figurative  meanings  that  have  no  relation  to  information 
technology.  In  the  2001  online  edition  of  the  Diccionario  de  la  lengua 
espanola,  the  word  navegar  has  the  new  meaning:  Desplazarse  a  traves  de  una 
red  informdtica  'to  move  from  one  place  to  another  through  an  information 
network',  i.e.,  to  browse.  The  following  are  representative  examples  of  semantic 
caiques  found  in  Spanish  Internet  language.  A  more  complete  Usting  appears  in 
Appendix  B: 

(8)     buscador  'search  engine' 
cargar  'upload' 

descargar  'to  download'/descargas  'downloads' 
dominio  'domain' 

navegar  'to  browse'/navegador  'browser'/navegacion  'browsing' 
pagina  'page' 
raton  'mouse' 
ventana  'window' 
servidor  'server' 

In  Spanish  Internet  language,  there  are  also  examples  of  existing  Spanish 
words  that  appear  to  be  caiques  but  are  not,  for  example,  busqueda  'search'. 
Such  words  do  not  take  on  new  meanings,  but  rather  extend  their  traditional 
meanings  to  a  new  area.  The  Diccionario  de  la  Lengua  Espanola  (Real 
Academia  Espaiiola  1992)  lists  busqueda  with  the  definition 

busca,  accion  de  buscar.  U.  con  frecuencia  en  los  archivos  y  escribanias 


Morin:  Engush/Spanish  Language  Contact  on  the  Internet  55 

'search,  action  of  searching.  Frequently  used  in  archives  and  court  clerks' 
offices'. 

On  the  Internet,  the  meaning  of  busqueda  remains  the  same,  but  it  is 
extended  to  include  electronic  archives.  It  is  not  a  caique,  an  already 
existing  item  with  a  new  meaning,  but  rather  a  semantic  extension,  a  lexical 
item  whose  traditional  meaning  is  extended  to  cover  more  ground.  Other 
words  that  might  be  included  in  this  group  are  clave  'password',  charlas 
'chat',  contrasena  'password', /oro  'forum',  membresia  'membership',  and 
pldticas  'chat'.  Membresia  is  attested  in  the  Spanish  of  Ecuador,  El 
Salvador,  Guatemala,  Honduras,  Mexico  and  Panama.  Interestingly,  it  does 
not  appear  in  the  1992  print  edition  of  the  Diccionario  de  la  Lengua 
Espanola,  but  it  does  appear  in  the  2001  online  edition. 

5.5.   Loan  blends 

In  a  loan  blend,  part  of  the  phonemic  shape  of  the  word  is  imported,  while  a 
native  portion  has  been  substituted  for  the  rest,  that  is,  a  compound  is  analyzed 
into  its  constituent  morphemes,  and  a  partial  substitution  is  made.  There  are  few  in 
Spanish  Internet  language,  and  most  appear  to  use  proper  names  in  Spanish  as  the 
native  portion  of  the  blend,  as  shown  by  the  following  examples: 

(9)     ecuanet  (Ecuadorian  server) 

ecuapaging  (paging  services  on  Ecuadorian  Server) 
ecuaforos  (forums  on  Ecuadorian  server) 
ecuachat  (chat  rooms  on  Ecuadorian  server) 
ecuacards  (online  greeting  cards  on  Ecuadorian  server) 
clarinmail  (e-mail  associated  with  Argentinean  online  newspaper 

Clarin) 
Ambitoweb  (website  for  Ambito  Financier©) 

6.      Conclusions 

Spanish/English  contact  on  the  Internet  is  far  from  what  we  traditionally  consider 
a  language  contact  situation.  Nonetheless,  it  is  possible  to  look  at  this  virtual 
language  contact  situation,  and  use  traditional  tools  to  analyze  the  recurrent 
borrowing  phenomena  that  are  found  across  a  large  number  of  Spanish  language 
servers  and  web  pages.  Just  as  in  traditional  language  contact,  loanwords  and 
borrowing  are  the  most  common  phenomena,  but  there  are  also  examples  of  loan 
translations,  semantic  caiques  and  loan  blends.  In  addition,  Internet  language 
borrowings  undergo  integration  in  much  the  same  way  as  borrowings  in 
traditional  contact  situations,  by  consistently  occupying  the  correct  syntactic  slot 
in  a  sentence,  by  receiving  consistent  gender  assignment,  by  adapting  to 
phonological  and  morphological  patterns  of  the  recipient  language,  by 
conforming  to  the  orthographic  patterns  of  the  recipient  language,  and  by 
appearing  in  written  texts  without  any  of  the  flagging  devices  that  indicate 
awareness  of  the  foreign  status  of  a  lexical  item. 

The  study  of  Spanish/English  contact  on  the  Internet  provides  a  rich  field 


56  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

for  future  research.  First,  this  study  examines  only  written  texts,  without  delving 
into  the  level  and  rate  of  phonological  integration  of  foreign  lexical  items  for 
bilingual  and  monolingual  speakers.  In  addition  it  does  not  consider  whether 
items  from  Spanish  Internet  language  that  have  achieved  a  certain  level  of 
integration  have  done  so  across  the  board,  or  if  age,  education,  sex,  social  class, 
and  familiarity  with  English  have  an  effect  on  the  willingness  or  ability  of  Spanish 
speakers  to  use  such  borrowed  lexical  items.  Finally,  it  has  been  shown  above 
that  the  rate  of  integration  of  borrowed  lexical  terms  is  inconsistent.  Some  lexical 
items  have  acquired  word  list  status  very  rapidly,  appearing  in  scholarly 
publications,  Spanish  language  dictionaries,  and  online  and  print  newspapers, 
with  morphological,  phonological  and  orthographic  adaptations,  while  others  are 
still  quite  far  from  being  considered  in  any  way  Spanish.  Except  in  the  case  of 
die  or  cliquea,  modem  and  pixel,  even  in  the  case  of  borrowed  lexical  items  that 
appear  in  the  dictionary,  or  that  already  have  a  number  of  related  forms,  the 
orthography  is  still  very  much  foreign,  even  though  the  phonology  is  showing 
signs  of  conforming  to  Spanish  sound  patterns  (recall  the  spelling  pronunciations 
of  'hardware'  ijdrduer)  and  'software'  (softuer)  offered  by  the  VOX  online 
dictionary),  and  word  families  are  being  created  through  conventional  Spanish 
derivation.  Since  language  change  is  occurring  very  rapidly  in  this  situation  it 
may  be  possible  in  a  very  short  time  to  document  the  adaptation  to  Spanish 
patterns  of  orthography,  morphology  and  phonology  of  English  language 
Internet  lexis.  The  study  of  Spanish/English  contact  on  the  Internet  will  provide 
us  with  as  fertile  a  field  for  observing  and  documenting  language  change  as  has 
the  geographical  contact  that  has  resulted  in  so  much  research  on  traditional 
Spanish/EngUsh  contact  situations. 


Morin:  Engush/Spanish  Language  Contact  on  the  Internet  57 

APPENDIX  A 
SPANISH  LANGUAGE  SERVERS  AND  WEBSITES  CONSULTED 

(1)  Servers  and  portals 
http://bacan.com  (Ecuador) 
http://wwwl.ecua.net.ec  (Ecuador) 

http://www.tuGueb.com  (portal  for  Gaceta  Universitaria  -  Spain) 
http://www.ozu.es  (Spain) 

http://www.terra.es  (Spain  and  International) 
http://cnienlinea.com  (Mexico) 
http://www.univision.com  (Mexico) 
http://www.esmas.coni/televisahome  (Mexico) 
http://www.rcp.net.pe  (Peru) 
http://www.terra.com.ar  (Argentina) 
http://www.yagua.com  (Paraguay) 
http://www.chilebusca.cl  (Chile) 
http://www.buscaniguas.com.sv  (El  Salvador) 
http://us.uruguaytotal.com  (Uruguay) 
http://www.auyantepui.com  (Venezuela) 
http://espanol.yahoo.com  (Yahoo  U.S.  in  Spanish) 
http://ar.yahoo.com  (Yahoo  Argentina) 
http://mx.yahoo.com  (Yahoo  Mexico) 

(2)  Online  newspapers 
http://marca.com  (Spain) 
http://www.abc.es  (Spain) 
http://www.5dias.com  (Spain) 
http://www.as.com  (Spain) 
http://www.expansion.com  (Spain) 
http://www.ole.clarin.com  (Argentina) 
http://www.lanacion.com.ar  (Argentina) 
http://www.larazon.com.ar  (Argentina) 
http://www.clarin.com  (Argentina) 
http://www.elindependiente.com.ar  (Argentina) 
http://www.enel.net/rumbodiario  (Dominican  Republic) 
http://www.hoy.com.do  (Dominican  Republic) 
http://www.prensalibre.com/pls/prensa/index2.jsp  (Guatemala) 
http://www.eldiario.net  (Bolivia) 

http://eltiempo.com  (Columbia) 
http://www.nacion.co.cr  (Costa  Rica) 
http://www.nuevaprensa.org/scripts/index.html  (Cuba) 
http://chile.primerapagina.com  (Chile) 
http://www.elcomercio.com  (Ecuador) 

http://www.laprensagrafica.com/portada/default.asp  (El  Salvador) 
http://www.lahora.com.gt  (Guatemala) 
http://www.laprensahn.com  (Honduras) 
http://www.laprensa.com.ni  (Nicaragua) 


58  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

http://www.prensa.com/hoy/portada.shtml  (Panama) 
http://www.(liarionoticias.com.py/200307 1 8/index.php  (Paraguay) 
http://www.estrelladepr.com  (Puerto  Rico) 
http://www.elpais.com.uy/03/07/18  (Uruguay) 
http://www.el-nacional.com  (Venezuela) 

(3)  Dictionaries 

http://www.rae.es  (Real  Academia  Espanola,  2001) 
http://www.elmundo.es/diccionarios 

http://www.diccionarios.com/index.phtml  (Diccionario  General  de  la 
Lengua  Espanola  VOX  online) 

(4)  Assorted 

http://www.periodistadigital.com  (has  links  to  many  Spanish  language 

newspapers) 
http://www.cibercentro.com  (links  to  Spanish  language  newspapers,  servers 

and  search  engines) 
http://www.trinity.edu/mstroud/spanish/spanUnk.html  (has  links  to 

newspapers,  servers,  and  cultural  sites) 
http://www.novomedia.es/web/medios/intemet.htm  (Spanish  website  linked 

to  a  number  of  newspapers) 

APPENDIX  B 
ADDITIONAL  EXAMPLES  OF  LINGUISTIC  BORROWINGS 

1)  Additional  Unintegrated  Borrowings 

cibercampaiia  'cyber  campaign' 

(sitio)  cobrandeados  'co  branders' 

encriptar 

firewall 

newsletters 

password 

splitter 

weblog/webloggers 

webmail 

webmaster 

webcam 

website 

2)  Additional  Loan  Translations 

buzon  electronico  'electronic  mailbox' 

camara  web  'webcam' 

carpeta  C  'C  drive' 

codigo  de  cliente  'login' 

correos  basura  'junk  mail' 

en  linea  'online' 

hiperenlaces  'hyperlinks' 


Morin:  English/Spanish  Language  Contact  on  the  Internet  59 

pagina  de  entrada  'homepage' 

pagina  de  inicio  'homepage' 

pkata  cibemetico  'hacker' 

proteccion  antivirus  'virus  protection' 

recorrido  grafico  'virtual  tour' 

salas  de  chat  'chatrooms' 

sitio(s)  web  'website(s)' 

teletrabajo  'telecommuting' 

ventanas  interactivas  'interactive  windows' 

3)      Additional  Semantic  Caiques 

ambientes  'IMVironments'  (Instant  Messaging  Environments) 

bajar  'download'  (jbajatelo  ya!  from  http://ar.messenger.yahoo.com) 

bajado  'downloaded' 

controladores  'drivers' 

entomos  'IMVironments'  (Instant  Messaging  Environments) 

gusano  'worm,  virus' 

portal  'website' 

virus  'computer  virus' 


6 0  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

REFERENCES 

Amastae,  Jon   &  Lucia  Elias-Oltvares  (eds.)   1982.  Spanish   in   the   United 

States:  Sociolinguistic  Aspects.  Cambridge:  Cambridge  University  Press. 
Anderson,  John  (ed.)  1982.  language  Form  and  Linguistic  Variation:  Papers 

Dedicated  to  Angus  Mcintosh.  Amsterdam:  John  Benjamins. 
Daiuta,  Amy.  1984.  Remarks  on  calquing.  CUNY  Forum:  Papers  in  Linguistics 

10.70-89. 
DicciONARio  General  de  la  Lengua  Espanola  VOX  (onhne).  2000.  Barcelona: 

Spes  Editorial. 
Gibbons,  John.  1987.  Code-mixing  and  Code-choice:  A  Hong  Kong  Case  Study. 

Clevedon,  UK:  Multilingual  Matters. 
Grant-Russell,  Pamela.  1999.  The  influence  of  French  on  Quebec   English: 

Motivation  for  lexical  borrowing  and  integration  of  loan  words.  LACUS 

Forum  25.473-86. 
Haugen,  Einar.  1950.  The  analysis  of  linguistic  borrowing.  Language  26.210-31. 
Jacobson,  Rodolfo  (ed.)  1990.  Codeswitching   as  a  worldwide  phenomenon. 

New  York:  Peter  Lang. 
Macaulay,  Donald.  1982.  Borrow,  caique  and  switch:  The  law  of  the  English 

frontier.  In:  Anderson  (ed.),  203-237. 
Martin,  Elizabeth.  1998.  The  use  of  English  in  written  French  advertising:  A 

study  of  code-switching  and  code-mixing,  and  borrowing  in  a  commercial 

context.  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  28:1.159-84. 
Myers  Scotton,  Carol.  1990.  Codeswitching  and  borrowing:  Interpersonal  and 

macrolevel  meaning.  In:  Jacobson  (ed.),  85-110. 
Otheguy,  Ricardo,  Ofelia  Garcia,  &  Mariela  Fernandez   1989.   Transferring, 

switching,  and  modeling  in  West  New  York  Spanish:  An  intergenerational 

study.  International  Journal  of  the  Sociology  of  Language  Special  Issue 

79.41-52. 
Palmer,  Joe  &  Brigitte  Harris.  1990.  Prestige  differential  and  language  change. 

Bulletin  of  the  Canadian  Association  of  Applied  Linguistics  12:77-86. 
PiNOL,  Mar  Cruz.  1999.  Intrusos  cibemeticos  en  la  clase  de  espaiiol/LE:  Siglas, 

acortamientos  y  combinaciones  en  el  espanol  de  la  Internet.  Especulo  12. 
.  2000.  La  red  hispanohablante:  La  Internet  y  la  enseiianza  del  espanol  como 

lengua  extranjera.  Journal  of  Iberian  and  Latin  American  Studies,  6:1.93- 

103. 
PoPLACK,  Shana,  David  Sankoff  &  Christopher  Miller.    1988.    The   social 

correlates  and  linguistic  processes  of  lexical  borrowing  and  assimilation. 

Linguistics  26.47-104. 
Real  Academia  Espaiiola.  1992.  Diccionario  de  la  lengua  espanola.  21st  ed. 

Madrid:  Espasa  Calpe. 

.  2001.  Diccionario  de  la  Lengua  Espanola  (online),  <http://www.rae.es>. 

SiLVA-CORVALAN,  Carmen.  1994.  Language  Contact  and  Change:   Spanish   in 

Los  Angeles.  New  York:  Oxford  University  Press. 
SoBiN,  Nicolas.  1982.  Texas  Spanish  and  lexical  borrowing.  In:  Amastae  &  Elias- 

Olivares  (eds.),  166-181. 


Morin:  English/Spanish  Language  Contact  on  the  Internet  61 

SOLER,  Joaquin.  1997.  Internet.  El  espanol  y  los  cimientos  de  un  cambio  global. 

Cuademos  Cervantes  de  la  Lengua  Espahola  16.58-62. 
TiMM,  L.A.   1975.  Spanish-English  code-switching:   El  porque   y   how-not-to. 

Romance  Philology  28.473-82. 
TiMOFEEVA,  Galina.  2001.  Russian  Internet  language:  Innovations  on  web  sites. 

New  Zealand  Slavonic  Journal  35.199-210. 
TORIBIO,  Almeida  Jacqueline.  2002.  Spanish-Enghsh  code-switching  among  US 

Latinos.  International  Journal  of  the  Sociology  of  Language  158.89-1 19. 
Weinreich,  Uriel.  1967.  Languages  in  Contact:   Findings  and  Problems.  The 

Hague:  Mouton. 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences 
Volume  32,  Number  2  (Fall  2002) 

TWO  TYPES  OF  NEGATION  NOT  AND  SCOPE  AMBIGUITIES 

Keun  Young  Shin 

University  of  Illinois  at  Urbana-Champaign 

keunshin  @  uiuc.edu 

Dynamic  Montague  Grammar  (DMG)  presented  by  Groenendijk  & 
Stokhof  (1990)  assumes  that  negation  not  is  always  interpreted  as 
sentence  negation  and  normally  treated  in  a  static  way.  Under  this 
analysis,  all  anaphoric  relations  between  terms  occurring  in  a  negated 
sentence  and  anaphora  outside  the  sentence  are  impossible.  However, 
this  runs  against  our  intuitions  on  the  sequence  of  sentences  A  man 
does  not  walk  in.  He  stays  outside.  In  addition,  the  current  DMG 
analysis  fails  to  capture  the  ambiguities  of  a  negated  sentence  with 
quantified  noun  phrases  correctly.  This  paper  proposes  that  negation 
not  is  an  expression  of  two  types,  which  can  be  adjoined  to  two 
different  expressions:  a  verb  phrase  (i.e.,  an  expression  of  an 
intransitive  verb  type)  and  a  sentence.  Negation  is  applied  according  to 
two  rules:  (i)  negation  not  cannot  be  raised  after  Quantifier  raising  and 
(ii)  quantified  noun  phrases  cannot  be  raised  outside  of  the  scope  of 
negation  when  they  are  in  subject  position.  This  approach  correctly 
predicts  that  not  every  sentence  with  negation  and  quantified  noun 
phrases  exhibits  scope  ambiguities  or  prohibits  anaphoric  relations  to 
pronouns  outside  the  sentence. 

1.      Introduction 

Dynamic  Montague  Grammar  (DMG)  presented  by  Groenendijk  «&;  Stokhof 
(1990)  assumes  that  negation  is  always  adjoined  to  a  whole  sentence  and  is 
normally  treated  in  a  static  way.  Under  this  approach,  if  a  sentence  is  negated,  all 
anaphoric  relations  between  terms  occurring  in  the  sentence  and  anaphora  outside 
the  sentence  are  impossible.  However,  this  runs  against  our  intuitions  on  the 
sequence  of  sentences  in  (1).  The  indefinite  noun  a  man  occurring  in  the  negated 
sentence  is  anaphorically  linked  to  the  pronoun  in  (1). 

(1)  A  man  does  not  walk  in.  He  stays  outside. 

Moreover,  the  current  approach  fails  to  capture  the  ambiguities  of  a  negated 
sentence  with  quantified  noun  phrases  correctly.  Consider  the  sentences  in  (2). 

(2)  a.       Not  every  man  walks  in. 

b.      Every  man  does  not  walk  in 

Sentences  (2a)  and  (2b)  differ  by  virtue  of  the  position  of  negation  on  the  surface 
representation,  and  this  results  in  different  interpretations:  sentence  (2b)  is 
ambiguous  whereas  sentence  (2a)  is  not.  Sentence  (2a)  has  only  one  reading  that 

©  2005  Keun  Young  Shin 


64  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

there  are  some  men  who  do  not  walk  in.  In  addition  to  this  reading,  sentence  (2b) 
has  the  reading  that  no  man  walks  in.  However,  the  current  DMG  approach 
predicts  that  sentence  (2a)  would  be  interpreted  exactly  the  same  as  (2b). 

This  paper  proposes  an  alternative  analysis  for  interpreting  negation  not  on 
the  grounds  that  not  every  sentence  with  negation  and  quantified  noun  phrases 
exhibits  scope  ambiguities  or  prohibits  anaphoric  relations  to  pronouns  outside  the 
sentence.  Negation  is  an  expression  of  two  types,  which  can  be  adjoined  to  two 
different  expressions:  a  verb  phrase  (i.e.,  an  expression  of  an  intransitive  verb 
type)  and  a  sentence.  The  ambiguities  of  a  negated  sentence  with  quantified  noun 
phrases  can  be  captured  by  two  appUcation  rules:  (i)  Negation  raising  should  be 
appUed  before  Quantifier  raising,  and  (ii)  a  term  in  subject  position  is  not  raised. 

This  paper  is  organized  as  follows.  Section  2  presents  the  problem  in  dealing 
with  negation  not  using  Dynamic  Montague  Grammar  in  detail.  Section  3  deals 
with  scope  ambiguity  analysis  and  its  problems.  In  Section  4,  I  will  propose  an 
alternative  analysis  for  negation  not  and  present  how  this  analysis  captures  the 
ambiguities  of  a  negated  sentence  with  quantified  noun  phrases  as  well  as 
anaphoric  relations  involving  negation.  Section  5  summarizes  the  conclusions  of 
this  paper. 

2.       PreviGus  analysis:  Dynamic  Montague  Grammar 

Groenendijk  &  Stokhof  (1990)  propose  Dynamic  Montague  Grammar  (DMG), 
where  they  use  a  system  of  dynamic  intensional  logic  as  the  semantic  component 
of  a  Montague-style  grammar.  I  assume  familiarity  with  the  dynamic  intensional 
logic  system  (Groenendijk  &  Stokhof  1991)  as  well  as  the  type  theory  of 
Montague  (1974). 

The  basic  expressions  I  will  use  in  this  paper  are  adopted  from  Groenendijk 
&  Stokhof  (1991).  They  are  translated  in  (3),  where  x  is  a  variable  of  type  e,  P  and 
Q  of  type  <s,  <e,  «s,  t>,  t»>,  and  p  of  type  <s,  «s,  <e,  «s,  t>,  t»>,  «s,  t>, 
t»>;  j  is  a  constant  of  type  e,  'man'  and  'walk'  are  constants  of  type  <e,  t>,  and 
'see'  of  type  <e,  <e,  t»;  the  dj  is  a  discourse  marker. 

(3)     Definition  1  (Translations  of  basic  expressions) 

a.  man  -^  AjcTman(x) 

b.  walk  — >  AjcTwalk(x) 

c.  see^XpXx["^{'^Xy1'seeiy)ix))] 

d.  a,  -^XPXBd,  [  T(d,);  "Q  (dj)] 

e.  every,  -^XPXQ^d,  [  T(d,)  ^  ^Q  (d^)] 

f.  he,  -^XQ  [  ^Q  (d,)] 

g.  John,3XQ[{j/di}-Q(d,)] 

DMG  assumes  that  negation  is  adjoined  to  a  whole  sentence  and  interpreted 
as  //  is  not  the  case  that.  Under  this  approach,  negation  is  normally  treated  in  a 
static  way,  although  there  are  two  kinds  of  negation,  dynamic  negation  and  static 
negation,  as  defined  in  (4): 


Shin:  Two  Types  of  Negation  Not  and  Scope  AMBiGurriES  65 

(4)  Definition  2  (Negation) 

Static  negation  -0  =  T-iiO 

Dynamic  negation      ~<I)  =  A,p-<(<I)(p)) 

Due  to  the  definition  of  static  negation,  dynamic  effects  of  expressions  inside  the 
scope  of  negation  are  blocked.  That  is  to  say,  if  a  sentence  is  negated,  all 
anaphoric  relations  between  terms  occurring  in  the  sentence  and  anaphora  outside 
the  sentence  are  not  possible.  This  analysis  gives  the  right  prediction  for  the 
examples  in  (5)  and  (6).  The  pronoun  in  the  second  sentence  cannot  be  interpreted 
as  being  anaphorically  linked  to  the  quantified  noun  phrases  in  the  first  sentence, 
which  is  translated  in  (7). 

(5)  It  is  not  the  case  that  a  man  walks  in  the  park.  *He  whistles. 

(6)  No  man  walks  in  the  park.  *He  whistles. 

(7)  A,p[-i3x[man(x)  a  walk-in(x)]  a  ''p] 

However,  consider  the  direct  natural  language  counterpart  sentence  instead 
of  the  usual  indirect  translation  using  the  expression  it  is  not  the  case  that. 

(8)  A  man  does  not  walk  in.  He  stays  outside. 

The  DMG  approach  assumes  that  the  sequence  of  sentences  in  (8)  is  interpreted 
exactly  the  same  as  It  is  not  the  case  that  a  man  walks  in.  *He  stays  outside.  In 
other  words,  the  first  sentence  in  (8)  is  translated  as  in  (7),  and  it  is  predicted  that 
the  pronoun  in  the  second  sentence  cannot  be  anaphoric  to  the  indefinite  noun  a 
man  occurring  in  the  first  sentence.  However,  this  runs  against  our  intuitions  on 
sentence  (8).  Negation  not  in  (8)  cannot  be  translated  as  dynamic  negation  in  order 
to  allow  the  anaphoric  relation.  Dynamic  negation  and  other  functional  appUcation 
produce  the  following  translation  of  the  first  sentence  in  (8). 

(9)  X,p— i3x[man(x)  a  walk-in(x)  a  {x/d,}  ''p] 

This  translation  is  not  what  we  want.  In  a  situation  where  a  man  walks  in  and  he 
does  not  stay  outside,  (8)  is  false.  But  if  the  first  sentence  in  (8)  is  interpreted  as 
(9),  (8)  will  be  true  in  the  same  situation.  Moreover,  if  we  translate  sentence 
negation  as  dynamic  negation,  the  negation  in  the  sentence  extends  to  the 
sentences  that  follow  it  in  the  discourse.  In  order  to  prevent  this,  we  should  close 
off  the  negated  sentence  using  static  negation.  Therefore,  the  current  DMG 
approach  seems  to  fail  to  capture  the  anaphoric  relation  involving  sentences  with 
negation. 

3.     Problems  with  scope  ambiguity  analysis 

In  the  preceding  section,  we  have  seen  that  DMG  raises  a  problem  concerning  the 
analysis  of  anaphoric  relations  involving  negation.  It  fails  to  account  for  anaphoric 
relations  between  terms  occurring  in  a  negated  sentence  and  pronouns,  as  in 
sentence  (8).  One  attempt  to  solve  this  problem  is  to  assume  that  scope 
ambiguities  are  involved  in  sentence  (8).  Although  Groenendijk  &  Stokhof  (1990) 
do  not  discuss  scope  ambiguities,  we  can  say  that  negation  interacts  with 


66  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

quantified  noun  phrases  and  gives  rise  to  scope  ambiguities  following  traditional 
Montague  Grammar.  Sentence  (8)  can  have  the  following  two  syntactic  structures, 
represented  in  (10a)  and  (10b),  and  it  has  two  meanings  due  to  scope  ambiguities: 
(i)  there  is  a  man  who  does  not  walk  in,  and  (ii)  there  is  no  man  who  walks  in. 

(10)  a.       It  is  not  the  case  that  a  man  walks  in. 

a  man,       it  is  not  the  case  that  hcj  walks  in 


it  is  not  the  case  that  he,  walks  in 


hei  walks  in 

b.      It  is  not  the  case  that  a  man  walks  in. 


it  is  not  the  case  that  a  man  walks  in 


a  man  walKs  m 

We  have  already  seen  that  (10b)  does  not  allow  a  man  to  Unk  to  anaphora  outside 
the  sentence.  On  the  other  hand,  functional  application  and  some  standard 
reduction  produce  the  following  translation  of  (10a): 

(11)  A,pBx[man(x)A  [-i  walk(x)  A{x/d,}  "p]] 

Negation  has  a  narrow  scope  over  the  predicate  and  a  man  can  be  anaphoric  to  a 
pronoun  in  the  following  sentence.  Therefore  the  current  DMG  can  capture  the 
anaphoric  relation  in  sentence  (8)  using  scope  ambiguities. 

However,  this  approach  brings  out  problems.  First,  it  predicts  that  every 
sentence  with  negation  and  quantifier  noun  phrases  will  be  ambiguous  since 
negation  not  interacts  with  quantified  NPs  and  gives  rise  to  scope  ambiguities. 
Consider  the  sentences  in  (12). 

(12)  a.       Not  every  man  walks  in. 

b.       Every  man  does  not  walk  in. 

If  we  follow  the  current  approach,  (12a)  is  predicted  to  have  the  exactly  same 
interpretations  as  (12b).  But  (12a)  is  not  ambiguous,  whereas  (12b)  is.  Sentence 
( 1 2a)  has  only  one  reading,  namely  one  in  which  every  man  is  under  the  scope  of 
negation:  there  are  some  men  who  do  not  walk  in.  In  addition  to  this  reading, 
( 1 2b)  has  the  reading  where  every  man  is  raised  outside  of  the  scope  of  negation: 
no  man  walks  in.  Sentences  (12a)  and  (12b)  differ  by  virtue  of  the  position  of 
negation,  and  this  results  in  different  interpretations.  However,  the  scope 
ambiguity  approach  cannot  capture  the  difference  between  (12a)  and  (12b). 

Furthermore,  the  different  position  of  negation  affects  the  interpretation  of 
anaphoric  relations.  For  example,  the  anaphoric  relation  in  the  sequence  of 


Shin:  Two  Types  of  Negation  Not  and  Scope  Ambiguities  67 

sentences  A  man  does  not  walk  in.  He  stays  outside  is  different  from  the  one  in  // 
is  not  the  case  that  a  man  walks  in.  *He  stays  outside.  However,  the  scope 
ambiguity  approach  predicts  that  they  have  the  same  readings  and  that  the 
anaphoric  relation  in  It  is  not  the  case  that  a  man  walks  in.  *He  stays  outside 
should  be  possible.  Therefore,  the  scope  ambiguity  approach  does  not  capture  the 
fact  that  the  different  positions  of  negation  in  a  sentence  result  in  different 
interpretations. 

There  is  another  problem  with  the  assumption  that  negation  not  is  adjoined  to 
a  sentence,  as  pointed  out  by  Chierchia  &  McConnell-Ginet  (2000).  Consider  the 
following  sentence,  in  which  two  verb  phrases  are  conjoined. 

(13)  Every  student  is  tired  and  isn't  enjoying  the  show. 
(Chierchia  &  McConnell-Ginet  2000:415) 

If  not  is  only  combined  with  a  sentence  and  it  can  be  raised,  we  may  expect  that 
wide  scope  readings  for  negation  are  possible  in  conjoined  verb  phrases.  But  the 
only  possible  reading  for  (13)  is  one  in  which  negation  has  scope  over  the  second 
conjunct  but  not  over  the  first  conjunct.  In  other  words,  negation  is  combined  with 
the  second  verb  phrase,  not  with  the  whole  sentence.  However,  the  current  DMG, 
where  negation  is  only  combined  with  an  expression  of  type  «s,  t>,  t>,  i.e.,  a 
sentence,  cannot  deal  with  conjoined  verb  phrases  in  (13)  properly. 

One  might  argue  that  sentence  (13)  is  derived  from  conjoined  sentences  via 
conjunction  reduction.  Thus,  (13)  can  convert  to  (14),  with  negation  having 
narrow  scope  over  the  second  conjunct  in  (13). 

(14)  Every  student  is  tired  and  every  student  isn't  enjoying  the  show. 

However,  this  approach  raises  another  problem.  We  cannot  assign  the  correct  truth 
value  for  (13)  by  evaluating  each  conjunct  in  (14).  Sentence  (13)  requires  that  not 
a  single  student  is  enjoying  the  show:  for  every  student  x,  x  is  not  enjoying  the 
show.  In  a  situation  where  every  student  is  tired  and  only  some  of  them  are 
enjoying  the  show,  (13)  is  false,  but  (14)  can  be  true. 

In  summary,  the  scope  ambiguity  analysis  for  anaphoric  relations  cannot 
capture  two  important  points  as  follows: 

(i)  Available  readings  are  different  depending  on  the  position  of  negation: 
not  every  sentence  with  negation  and  quantified  noun  phrases  exhibits 
scope  ambiguities  or  allows  anaphoric  relations  to  pronouns  outside  the 
sentence. 

(ii)     Negation  can  be  adjoined  to  phrases  other  than  a  sentence. 

4.      Translation  rules  for  negation  not 

We  have  already  seen  that  negation  can  be  combined  with  an  expression  of  the 
category  of  intransitive  verb  phrases  (IV)  to  yield  an  IV  in  the  case  of  conjoined 
verb  phrases.  It  is  claimed  that  negation  can  be  combined  with  noun  phrases  and 
adverbs  as  well  as  verb  phrases  and  sentences  (Gamut  1991).  In  other  words, 
negation  is  combined  with  the  noun  phrase  every  man  in  the  sentence  Not  every 


68  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

man  walked  in.  But  this  claim  does  not  seem  to  be  strong.  If  not  can  negate  terms 
such  as  every  man  and  a  (single)  man,  we  should  expect  the  following  sentences  to 
be  acceptable  as  well. 

(15)  a.       *  John  likes  not  every  man. 

b.       *John  likes  not  a  (single)  man. 

However,  (15a)  and  (15b)  are  not  acceptable  to  most  native  English  speakers. 
Negation  not  immediately  preceding  a  term  is  acceptable  only  when  the  term  is  in 
subject  position,  but  not  in  object  position.  This  contrast  suggests  that  negation  is 
adjoined  not  to  a  term,  but  rather  to  a  whole  sentence.  Therefore,  I  assume  that  in 
sentence  Not  every  man  walked  in,  negation  is  combined  with  the  whole  sentence 
every  man  walked  in  and  that  traditionally  so-called  external  negation  of  a 
quantifier  is  sentence  negation. 

Consider  the  following  sentence  (16),  which  can  have  the  interpretation  that 
the  adverb  always  is  negated,  that  is,  John  sometimes  smiles. 

(16)  John  does  not  always  smile. 

Predicate  adverbs  Uke  always  in  (16)  are  expressions  that  yield  an  IV  when 
applied  to  an  IV.  Assuming  that  negation  can  be  adjoined  to  an  IV,  we  do  not  need 
to  stipulate  any  additional  negation  rule  to  capture  that  not  is  attached  to  the 
predicate  adverb  in  (16)  since  negation  will  be  adjoined  to  the  IV  always  smile. 

Therefore,  I  propose  that  negation  not  is  an  expression  of  two  types: 
sentence  negation  and  IV  negation.  They  are  defined  as  in  (17)  where  x  is  a 
variable  of  type  e,  P  of  type  <s,  <e,  «s,  t>,  t»>,  and  0  of  type  <s,  «s,  t>,  t». 

(17)  Rules  OF  Negation /vor 

-  Translation  rules  for  negation  not 

a.  Sentence  negation  not  not  ->  X<P  [~^0] 

b.  IV  NEGATION  NOT  not  -^XPXx  [-"P  (x)] 

-  Rules  for  application 

c.  Negation  raising 

Negation  not  can  be  raised,  but  it  caimot  be  lowered. 

d.  Quantifier  raising  blocking 

A  term  a  carmot  be  raised  outside  of  the  scope  of  negation. 

The  application  rules  (17c)  and  (17d)  capture  the  fact  that  available  readings  are 
different  depending  on  where  negation  occurs.  According  to  the  negation  rules  in 
(17),  Not  every  man  walked  in  will  have  only  one  interpretation,  that  is,  negation 
not  is  adjoined  to  the  sentence  Every  man  walked  in.  We  cannot  get  the 
interpretation  as  that  for  every  man  x,  x  did  not  walk  in,  since  rule  (17d)  blocks  the 
NP  from  raising  outside  of  the  scope  of  negation.  On  the  other  hand,  the  sentence 
Every  man  did  not  walk  in  will  have  two  interpretations  because  the  negation 
adjoined  to  an  IV  expression  can  be  raised  and  negate  a  whole  sentence.  That  is. 


Shin:  Two  Types  of  Negation  Not  and  Scope  Ambiguities  69 

negation  not  can  be  adjoined  to  either  the  IV  walk  in  or  the  sentence  Every  man 
walked  in. 

This  alternative  analysis  also  gives  the  right  prediction  that  the  different 
position  of  negation  affects  the  interpretation  of  anaphoric  relations.  Sentence  (18) 
has  the  following  two  syntactic  structures  represented  by  (18a)  and  (18b).  In  other 
words,  negation  can  be  interpreted  as  either  IV  negation  or  sentence  negation  and 
hence  sentence  (18)  has  two  possible  readings,  (19a)  and  (19b),  which  correspond 
to  (18a)  and  (18b)  respectively. 

(18)  A  man  didn't  walk  in. 

a.  [,p  a  man  [NOT  [ypwalk  in]]] 

b.  [NOT  [,p  a  man[ [y?  walk  in]]]] 


(19)  a.       ^p3x[man(x)A  ^  walk(x)  AJx/d, }  "p] 
b.       A,p[  — iBx[man(x)A  walk(x)  ]  a  ''p] 

When  negation  is  interpreted  as  IV  negation  as  in  (19a),  the  indefinite  noun  phrase 
a  man  is  outside  of  the  scope  of  negation  and  can  be  linked  anaphorically  to  a 
pronoun  occurring  outside  the  sentence.  However,  any  anaphoric  link  to  a  pronoun 
outside  the  sentence  is  blocked  when  negation  is  raised,  and  the  sentence  is 
interpreted  as  (19b).  Therefore,  this  analysis  gives  the  right  prediction  that  a 
pronoun  outside  sentence  (18)  can  be  anaphoric  to  a  man  when  it  is  interpreted  as 
in  (19a). 

However,  a  problem  arises  when  we  deal  with  examples  of  scope  ambiguity 
with  two  quantified  NPs  and  negation.  Consider  the  sentence  in  (20). 

(20)  Every  man  did  not  see  a  stop  sign. 

This  sentence  is  predicted  to  have  six  different  readings,  schematically  represented 
in  (21),  if  we  assume  that  traditional  scope  ambiguities  are  involved  (SS  stands  for 
'stop  sign'). 

(21)  a.       -nVx[man(x)  ^  3y[SS(y)Asee(x,y)]] 

b.  Vx  [man(x)  ->-n  3y[SS(y)Asee(x,y)]] 

c.  Vx  [man(x)  -^  3y[SS(y)A  -.see(x,y)]] 

d.  ^3y  [SS(y)  a  Vx[man(x)  ->  see(x,y)]] 

e.  3y  [SS(y)  a  -iVx[man(x)  -^  see(x,y)]] 

f.  3y  [SS(y)  a  Vx[man(x)  -^  ->see(x,y)]] 

Traditional  scope  ambiguities  derive  the  undesirable  readings  (21c)  and  (2 Id)  as 
well.  (21c)  has  the  interpretation  that  for  every  man  there  was  a  stop  sign  which  he 
did  not  see,  and  (2 Id)  means  that  there  was  no  stop  sign  such  that  every  man  saw 
it.  Assume  that  there  are  three  men  [Bill,  Tom,  John}  and  three  stop  signs  [A,  B, 
C).  If  everyone  saw  only  two  stop  signs  and  Bill,  Tom  and  John  did  not  see  the 
different  stop  sign  A,  B,  and  C  respectively,  (21c)  and  (21d)  will  be  true. 
However,  this  runs  against  English  native  speakers'  intuitions  for  sentence  (20). 


70  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

On  the  other  hand,  my  analysis  predicts  that  (21a)  and  (21b)  are  the  only 
possible  readings  for  sentence  (20).  In  order  to  get  two  other  possible  readings, 
namely  (21e)  and  (2 If),  the  noun  phrase  a  stop  sign  needs  to  be  raised  outside  the 
scope  of  negation.  But  the  noun  phrase  every  man  must  not  be  raised  outside  the 
scope  of  negation  in  order  to  prevent  the  undesirable  reading  (21c).  In  other 
words,  the  Quantifier  Raising  Blocking  (QRB)  should  be  restricted  to  a  term  in 
subject  position  as  in  (22d').  We  also  need  the  rule  restricting  the  order  of  raising 
as  in  (22c'):  Negation  raising  should  take  place  before  Quantified  NP  raising. 

(22)  Rules  for  apphcation  (revised) 

c'.     Negation  raising 

Negation  not  cannot  be  raised  after  Quantifier  raising 

d'.     Quantifier  raising  blocking 

A  term  a  cannot  be  raised  if  a  is  in  [Spec,  IP]  (i.e.,  if  a  e  P,/p/) ' 

Applying  the  rules  (22c')  and  (22d'),  sentence  (20)  will  have  four  different 
readings,  which  are  represented  schematically  as  follows: 

(23)  a.       [s  every  man  [NOT  [,v  [ysee]  [a  stop  sign]]]] 

b.       [s  a  stop  sign  [s  every  man  [  NOT  [,v  [v  see]  [ ]]]]] 


[s  NOT[s  every  man  [  _  [,v  [v  see]  [a  stop  sign]]]]] 

[s  a  stop  sign  [s  NOT  [s  every  man  [  _  Qy  [see]  [  _]]]]]] 


This  approach  also  accounts  for  different  anaphoric  relations  between  an 
indefinite  noun  in  subject  position  and  one  in  object  position  when  negation  is 
attached  to  a  verb  phrase.  Consider  the  sequences  of  sentences  in  (24)  and  (25). 

(24)  A  man  does  not  have  a  cat.  *It  is  under  the  tree/  He  has  a  dog. 


'  We  can  still  deal  with  examples  of  scof)e  ambiguity  with  two  quantifiers  in  (i)  or  de  dicto/de  re  ambiguity 
in  (ii)  using  the  QRB  rule  in  (22d'). 

(i)         Every  man  saw  a  stop  sign. 

(ii)  A  man  seeks  a  unicorn. 
Sentence  (i)  will  have  two  readings  depending  on  whether  the  object  NP  is  raised  or  not.  Even  if  every  man 
in  subject  fxjsition  is  raised  after  raising  a  stop  sign  in  object  position  in  (i),  we  will  get  the  same  result  as 
when  there  is  no  quantifier  raising.  In  (ii),  the  ambiguity  of  de  dicto/de  re  reading  is  due  to  the  scope  of  the 
intensional  verb  seek  and  the  object  NP  a  unicorn.  Therefore,  we  can  account  for  the  ambiguities  of  (i)  and 
(ii)  without  raising  a  noun  phrase  in  subject  position. 

However,  the  QRB  rule  seems  to  need  to  be  modified  in  order  to  deal  with  the  de  dicto/de  re 
ambiguity  that  sentences  with  intensional  verbs  give  rise  to: 

(iii)      John  believes  that  a  unicorn  walked  in. 
In  order  to  get  a  de  re  reading,  the  NP  a  unicorn  in  subject  position  should  be  raised:  a  unicorn  has  wide 
scope  over  the  intensional  verb  believe.  This  problem  might  be  solved  by  allowing  NP  raising  when  the  NP 
is  in  the  subject  position  of  the  embedded  clause. 


Shin:  Two  Types  of  Negation  Not  and  Scope  Ambiguities  71 

(25)  A  man  did  not  see  a  cat.  It  is  under  the  table/  He  saw  a  dog. 

Both  (24)  and  (25)  allow  a  man  to  link  anaphorically  to  a  pronoun  outside  the 
negated  sentence.  In  other  words,  an  indefinite  noun  in  subject  position  can  have 
anaphoric  relations  with  pronouns  occurring  outside  the  negated  sentence,  when  it 
precedes  negation  and  there  is  no  presupposition  that  the  entity  referred  to  by  the 
subject  NP  does  not  exist.  But  this  is  not  true  for  an  indefinite  noun  in  object 
position.  The  object  a  cat  in  (24)  cannot  have  anaphoric  relations  with  pronouns 
outside  the  negated  sentence.  The  first  sentences  in  (24)  and  (25)  differ  in  terms  of 
verb  type,  and  this  results  in  differences  with  respect  to  anaphoric  relations  with 
pronouns  outside  the  first  sentences. 

Our  analysis  predicts  that  when  negation  is  adjoined  to  IV,  a  term  in  object 
position  should  be  raised  in  order  to  link  to  pronouns  outside  the  negated  sentence, 
whereas  a  term  in  subject  position  can  have  anaphoric  relations  with  pronouns 
outside  the  sentence  without  such  a  process.  Assuming  that  existential  quantifier 
raising  can  be  blocked  depending  on  the  type  of  a  given  verb,  we  can  capture  the 
difference  between  (24)  and  (25).  That  is  to  say,  the  raising  of  the  indefinite  NP  in 
object  position  outside  the  scope  of  IV  negation  is  blocked  by  the  verb  have  in  the 
first  sentence  in  (24)  and  hence  cannot  have  an  anaphoric  relation  with  the 
pronoun  in  the  following  sentence.  However,  an  indefinite  noun  in  subject  position 
is  outside  the  scope  of  IV  negation,  and  it  can  link  anaphorically  to  pronouns 
outside  the  negated  sentence  regardless  of  the  type  of  a  given  verb.'^ 

5.       Conclusion 

If  negation  is  always  interpreted  as  sentence  negation  and  anaphoric  relations  are 
dealt  with  by  ambiguities  in  the  scope  of  the  antecedent,  we  fail  to  capture  the  fact 
that  available  readings  are  different  depending  on  the  position  of  negation.  In  this 
paper,  I  have  proposed  that  negation  not  is  an  expression  of  two  types  and  can  be 
adjoined  to  IV  and  S.  The  ambiguities  of  a  negated  sentence  with  quantified  noun 
phrases  are  accounted  for  by  two  rules:  (i)  negation  not  cannot  be  raised  after 
Quantifier  raising  and  (ii)  quantified  noun  phrases  cannot  be  raised  outside  of  the 
scope  of  negation  when  they  are  in  [Spec,  IP].  This  predicts  that  not  every 
sentence  with  negation  and  quantified  noun  phrases  will  exhibit  ambiguity. 
Moreover,  we  can  predict  that  the  number  of  available  readings  is  different 


^  However  there  are  cases  where  anaphoric  links  between  indefinite  noun  phrases  occurring  in  the  object 
position  of  the  state  verb  have  and  pronouns  outside  the  sentence  are  not  blocked,  as  in  (i).  In  order  to 
account  for  this  anaphoric  relation,  Groenendijk  and  Stokhof  (1990)  treat  example  (i)  using  dynamic 
negation  and  dynamic  disjunction  as  illustrated  in  (ii).  It  is  obvious  that  further  research  is  necessary  to 
clarify  when  the  dynamic  versions  of  the  operators  should  be  used. 

(i)        Either  Morris  Hall  does  not  have  a  bathroom  or  it  is  in  a  funny  place, 
(ii)       Either- 3d2[Tbathroom(d2);Thave(MH,  d2)]or  [Tin-a-funny-place(d2)] 
3d2[Tbathroom(d2);Thave(MH,  d2)]=*  Tin-a-funny-place(d2) 
Vd2  [  [Tbathroom(d2);Thave(MH,  d2)]=>  Tin-a-funny-place(d2)] 


72  STUDffiS  IN  THE  LINGUISTIC  SCIENCES  32:2  (FALL  2002) 

depending  on  where  negation  occurs,  even  if  two  sentences  with  negation  have  the 
same  number  of  quantified  noun  phrases. 

REFERENCES 

Chierchia,  Gennaro.  1992.  Anaphora  and  dynamic  binding.  Linguistics  and 

Philosophy  \5.l\l-lS3. 
Chierchia,  Gennaro,  &    Sally  McConnell-Ginet.    2000.    Meaning   and 

Grammar:  An  Introduction  to  Semantics.  Cambridge,  Mass.:  The  MIT  Press. 
Gamut,  L.T.F.  1991.  Logic,  Language,  and  Meaning,  Volume  2:  Intensional 

Logic  and  Grammar.  Chicago:  The  University  of  Chicago  Press. 
Groenendijk,  Jeroen,  &  Martin  Stokhof.  1991.  Dynamic  Montague  Grammar. 

In:  Kalman  &  Polos  (eds),  3-48. 
Kalman,  Laszlo,   &  Laszlo  POLOS  (eds),  1991.  Proceedings  of  the  Second 

Symposium  on  Logic  and  Language.  Budapest:  Lorand  University  Press. 
Montague,  Richard.   1974.  Formal  Philosophy:  Selected  Papers  of  Richard 

Montague.  New  Haven:  Yale  University  Press. 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences 
Volume  32,  Number  2  (Fall  2002) 

ON  INFORMATION  PACKAGING  AND  HEARER  ENGAGEMENT  IN 
KASHMIRI  NARRATIVE 

Asha  Tickoo 

Southern  Illinois  University,  Edwardsville 

atickoo  @  siue.edu 

The  objective  of  this  paper  is  to  describe  a  feature  of  the  information 
packaging  in  Kashmiri  oral  narrative,  and  to  suggest  that  it  is  designed 
specifically  to  serve  the  oral  mode  of  narration.  Recurring  segments  in 
Kashmiri  oral  narrative  are  constructed  out  of  strings  of  sentences 
containing  propositions  that  are  informationally  highly  given.  When 
narrative  incrementations  utilize  more,  rather  than  less,  hearer-given 
information,  they  effect  greater  hearer  engagement  by  setting  the  hearer 
up  as  a  more  informed  participant  in  the  narration.  The  informed  hearer 
is  inevitably  engaged  because  s/he  becomes  a  potentially  active 
contributor  to  the  narrative.  I  will  suggest  that  it  is  possible  1)  to 
identify  two  main  types  of  highly  given  proposition  in  Kashmiri  oral 
narrative,  and  2)  to  demonstrate  that  they  are  able  to  effect  hearer 
engagement  in  somewhat  distinct  ways. 

1.      Introduction 

My  objective  in  this  paper  is  to  describe  a  feature  of  the  information  packaging  in 
Kashmiri  oral  narrative,  and  to  suggest  that  it  is  designed  specifically  to  serve  the 
oral  mode  of  narration.  Recurring  segments  in  Kashmiri  oral  narrative  are 
constructed  out  of  strings  of  sentences  containing  propositions  that  are 
informationally  highly  given  (cf.  for  example,  the  sentences  marked  verb  initial 
(VS)  and  preposed  (P)  in  the  Kashmiri  narrative  extract,  in  the  Appendix).  To  my 
knowledge,  this  is  not  the  norm  for  written  narrative,  or,  in  fact,  for  other  genres  of 
written  discourse,  either  in  Kashmiri  or  in  other  languages.  The  majority  of 
sentences  out  of  which  written  discourse  is  constructed  appear  to  contain  new 
propositions,  that  is,  propositions  that  are  only  sufficiently  given  to  be  coherent. 
This  is  understandable,  since  the  principal  objective  of  every  incrementation  in 
any  developing  text  must  be  to  introduce  new  information.  Yet,  Kashmiri  oral 
narrative  builds  a  significant  number  of  narrative  segments  out  of  sentential 
propositions  which  are  more  given  than  is  needed  to  merely  meet  the  coherency 
constraint,  containing,  hence,  only  a  relatively  small  new  component.  One  has  to 
wonder  about  the  motivation  for  this  type  of  information  distribution,  and  about 
the  impact  it  has  on  the  way  in  which  the  message  is  communicated. 

We  can  perceive  this  information-packaging  feature  as  an  attempt  to  frame 
the  sentential  new  contribution  in  terms  of  what  is  largely  known  to  the  hearer. 
But  we  must,  then,  also  acknowledge  that  framing  the  new  in  terms  of  the  given  is 

©  2005  Asha  Tickoo 


74  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

something  that  is  more  generally  effected  by  merely  implementing  the  coherency 
constraint,  by  simply  introducing  the  new  after  the  given  —  an  organization  of 
information  which  serves  to  facilitate  more  effective  communication,  by  easing 
the  task  of  information  processing  and  comprehension.  Further,  the  coherency 
constraint  and  the  given-before-new  distribution  of  information,  which  it  effects, 
allow  for  a  proposition  that  is  merely  given  enough  to  be  accessible,  a  proposition, 
that  is,  which  is  largely  new.  The  appearance  of  a  highly  given  proposition, 
carrying  a  relatively  small  new  component,  therefore,  appears  to  be  a  specialized 
manifestation  of  the  general  communicative  strategy  of  fashioning  the  new  out  of 
the  given.  As  such,  it  seems  to  me  that  it  is  also  likely  to  come  with  a  specialized 
associated  communicative  function,  beyond  the  general  effect  of  easing 
information  processing  and  comprehension.  I  would  like  to  suggest  that  there  is  a 
way  in  which  this  packaging  of  information  serves  to  engage  an  otherwise  passive 
interlocutor  in  the  essentially  monologic  communicative  act  of  narration. 

When  narrative  incrementations  utilize  more,  rather  than  less,  hearer-given 
information,  they  effect  greater  hearer  engagement  by  setting  the  hearer  up  as  a 
more  informed  participant  in  the  narration.  The  informed  hearer  is  inevitably 
engaged  because  s/he  becomes  a  potentially  active  contributor  to  the  narrative.  I 
will  suggest  that  it  is  possible  1)  to  identify  two  main  types  of  highly  given 
proposition  in  Kashmiri  oral  narrative,  and  2)  to  demonstrate  that  they  are  able  to 
effect  hearer  engagement  in  somewhat  distinct  ways. 

In  what  follows,  I  will  briefly  describe  each  of  these  two  distinct  types  of 
given  sentential  propositions,  and  the  word  order  pattern  characteristically  used  to 
mark  each  one.  I  will  then  try  to  suggest  the  communicative  end  served  by  the  use 
of  each  prepositional  type,  by  speaking  about  the  distinct  type  of  hearer 
engagement  brought  about  by  the  combination  of  sentence-level  pragmatic  effects 
and  broader  discourse  effects  produced  by  their  use.  Insightful  discussion  of  the 
first  type  of  given  proposition  (marked  by  means  of  the  preposed  construction) 
calls  for  a  much  more  lengthy  description  than  is  needed  for  the  second  type 
(marked  by  means  of  the  verb-initial  clause);  that  is,  the  need  for  clarity  makes  the 
apparent  imbalance  in  the  treatments  of  the  two  given  propositions  unavoidable. 

Some  of  the  most  significant  findings  of  this  study  are  derived  from  the 
analysis  of  a  sample  of  Kashmiri  oral  narrative.  Six  half-hour  recordings  of  oral 
narratives,  by  two  adult  native  speakers  of  Kashmiri,  were  transcribed  and 
analyzed  for  this  study;  a  randomly  selected  extract  from  one  of  these  is  included 
in  the  Appendix. 

2.      The  preposed  construction  and  the  given  proposition 

One  of  the  two  highly  given  propositions  used  for  text  incrementation  in  Kashmiri 
oral  narrative  is  marked  by  the  use  of  the  preposed  construction.  In  this  section,  I 
will  describe  the  givenness  of  the  Kashmiri  preposed  construction  and  the 
constraints,  therefore,  on  how  new  information  is  introduced  by  means  of  this  type 
of  sentential  incrementation. 


i 


TiCKOO:  On  iNfFORMATION  PACKAGING  AND  HEARER  ENGAGEMENT  75 

It  is  relevant  to  begin  by  pointing  out  that  preposing  in  Kashmiri  (and  also  in 
Hindi  and  English)  marks  an  atemporal  incrementation  to  the  text.  (cf.  2b  &  3b.  In 
these,  and  all  following  examples,  '^'  is  the  symbol  used  to  mark  the  focused 
sentential  element.)  (In  this  respect,  it  differs  from  fronting  by  scrambling  in 
languages  such  as  Hindi,  which  accommodate  both  preposing  and  fronting  by 
scrambling,  since  in  Hindi,  a  direct  object  can  be  fronted  by  scrambling  in  the 
environment  of  a  preceding  temporal  adverb  (cf.lb).) 

(1)  a.       shiila    ne    bohothsa  khana    pakaya 

Sheila   by    a-lot-of    food     cooked 
'Sheila  cooked  a  lot  of  food.' 
b.       aur    fir    wo  khana  usne  gariib  loogu(n)  me(n)     baanta 
and  then  that  food    she    poor  people    amongst  distributed 
'Then  she  distributed  that  food  amongst  the  poor.' 

(2)  a.       kuc  bhi     nahi  khata? 

nothing     not  eats 
'Doesn't  he  eat  anything?' 
b.      ^eek     buund       pani     bhi      wo  nahi  pita  (#fir) 
one     drop  of     water  even   he  not  drinks  (#then) 
'He  doesn't  even  drink  a  drop  of  water.' 

(examples  taken  from  Hindi) 

(3)  a.       They  had  a  baby  boy. 

b.      ''Tom  they  called  him  (#after  that). 

Additionally,  the  comparative  assessment  of  Kashmiri  and  the  better-studied 
English  preposing  (cf.  Tickoo  1992)  suggests  that  while  English  preposing  is 
constrained  to  be  salient  given  (defined  by  Prince  as  information  'the  speaker 
assumes  the  hearer  has  or  could  appropriately  have  ...  in  his/her  consciousness  at 
the  time  of  hearing  the  utterance'  (Prince  1981a:230)),  Kashmiri  preposing  is 
constrained  to  be  minimally  only  shared  knowledge  given  (defined  by  Prince  as 
information  'the  speaker  assumes  the  hearer  knows  or  can  infer  ...  (but  is  not 
necessarily  thinking  about)'  (Prince  1981a:230)).  Hence,  while  (2b)  and  (3b)  are 
both  atemporally  sequenced  clauses,  (2b)  is  shared  knowledge  given,  while  (3b)  is 
salient  given.  In  consequence,  (2b)  is  not  a  felicitous  English  preposing  (cf.  4b). 

(4)  a.       He  kept  a  strict  fast. 

b.      #  ^A  drop  of  water  he  didn't  even  have. 
He  didn't  even  have  ^a  drop  of  water. 

When  we  speak  of  salient  given  or  shared  knowledge  given,  we  are  speaking, 
as  suggested  above,  of  the  ways  in  which  the  incrementation  is  assumed  by  the 
speaker  to  be  given  to  the  hearer.  A  more  complete  representation  of 
givenness/newness  would,  at  the  same  time,  indicate  whether  the  incrementation  is 
given  or  new  to  the  discourse.  The  salient  proposition  makes  an  incrementation 
that  MAY  OR  MAY  NOT  BE  NEW  TO  THE  DISCOURSE,  but  is,  in  every  case,  ATTENDED 
TO  by  the  hearer  at  the  time  of  the  utterance.  The  shared  knowledge  proposition, 
on  the  other  hand,  makes  an  incrementation  that  is  new  to  THE  discourse,  but  is 
KNOWN  as  possible,  though  it  is  NOT  attended  to  by  the  hearer,  at  the  time  of  the 


76  Studies  in  the  LnsfGUiSTic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

utterance.  Both  of  these,  of  course,  differ  from  the  third  possibiUty,  the  standard 
proposition  of  the  clause  in  canonical  order,  which,  by  contrast,  is  new  to  the 
DISCOURSE  and  new  to  the  hearer  (that  is,  neither  attended  to,  nor  known)  at 
the  time  of  the  utterance.  It  is  also  relevant  to  mention  that  while  the  information 
represented  by  means  of  the  preposed  construction,  whether  shared  knowledge  or 
salient,  could  also  be  conveyed  by  means  of  the  clause  in  canonical  order, 
represented  in  the  preposed  construction,  it  comes  with  an  overt  signal  of  its 
hearer-given  status. 

2.1.    Saliency  and  scalarity 

The  saliency  constraint  on  English  preposing  comes  with  a  number  of  other 
defining  features,  which  are  useful  to  this  discussion  both  because  they  accurately 
account  for  the  corresponding  salient  subset  of  Kashmiri  preposing,  and  because 
they  help  locate  the  differences  in  the  identifying  features  of  the  broader  class  of 
shared  knowledge  preposings. 

First,  the  salient  proposition  of  English  preposing  is  distributed  into  two 
separate  constituents  —  1)  the  preposed  constituent  and  2)  the  open  proposition 
(obtained  by  substituting  a  variable  for  the  focal  constituent,  OP  for  future 
reference).  Each  of  these  constituents  is  independently  salient  given  (cf.  5b  &  6b) 
(Prince  1981b,  1984;  Ward  1985).  (English  preposing  is,  hence,  not  merely  a 
topic-creating  device,  as  suggested  in  earlier  hterature  (cf.  Halliday  1967;  Gundel 
1974;  Langacker  1974;  Rodman  1974;  Crieder  1979;  Bland  1980;  Reinhart  1981; 
Davison  1984).) 

(5)  Focus  Movement: 

a.  The  contras  devised  a  new  strategy. 

b.  Guerilla  Warfare,  they  called  it. 

(Ward  1985:290) 

In  (5b),  the  salient  OP  (obtained  by  substituting  a  variable  for  the  focal 
constituent)  is  'They  called  it  x  (x:  an  element  of  the  set  of  names  of  strategies)', 
and  the  salient  preposed  constituent  Guerilla  Warfare  is  an  instantiation  of  the 
variable  x. 

(6)  Topicalization: 

a.  I  made  two  minor  mistakes. 

b.  One,  apparently  ^everyone  in  the  class  made. 

Likewise,  in  (6b)  the  salient  OP  is  'x  made  some-number-of-mistakes,  where  x  is 
on  the  scale  members-of-the-class',  and  the  salient  preposed  constituent  'one'  is  an 
instantiation  of  the  nonfocal  variable  'some-number-of-mistakes'. 

It  is  important  for  our  purposes  to  recognize  that  the  relationship  of  salience, 
which  the  preposed  constituent  (and  also  the  focus,  in  Topicalization,  in  which  the 
focus  is  not  the  preposed  constituent)  bears  to  the  preceding  discourse,  is 
'scalar' (cf.  Ward  1985).  Understanding  the  relationship  of  scalarity,  as  it  appears 
in  English  preposing,  is  useful  to  our  appreciation  of  the  way  scalarity  is  realized 
in  Kashmiri  preposing.  When  the  salient  relationship  to  the  preceding  discourse  of 
the  preposed  constituent  (or  focus  in  Topicalization)  is  represented  as  scalar,  it  is 


J 


TicKoo:  On  Information  Packaging  and  Hearer  Engagement       77 

being  characterized  as  one  of  the  following  possible  types  of  relationships:  part  to 
whole,  subset  to  set,  greater  than,  less  than,  attribute  to  entity,  or  the  relationship 
of  equality.  (I  include  the  relationships  of  equality  and  attribute  to  as  scalar 
relationships,  because  they  have  been  so  categorized  in  earlier  work  on  preposing 
and  scalarity  (cf.  Ward  1985).  One  recognizes  intuitively,  however,  that  they  differ 
in  significant  ways  from  the  more  standard  scalar  relationships.)  This  means,  for 
example,  that  at  the  time  of  the  utterance  of  (5b),  the  speaker  assumes  that  the 
interlocutor  is  attending  both  to  the  strategy  and  the  conception  of  it  as  possessing 
certain  types  of  attributes;  the  preposed  constituent  Guerilla  Warfare,  then,  is  an 
instance  of  the  saUent  scalar  relationship  of  attribution.  Likewise,  at  the  time  of  the 
utterance  of  (7b),  the  speaker  assumes  that  the  interlocutor  is  attending  to  the 
entity  all  nuts  of  (7a)  and  the  perception  of  it  as  a  set  comprising  elements;  the 
preposed  constituent  peanuts  of  (7b),  then,  is  an  instance  of  the  scalar  salient 
relationship  of  element  of  set. 

(7)  a.       I  like  all  nuts, 
b.       Peanuts,  I  ''love. 

Tickoo  (1992)  also  characterizes  the  salience  of  the  OP  in  terms  of  scalar 
relationships.  Three  types  of  scalar  salient  OP  relationships  —  attribution,  as  in 
(8),  prerequisite  to,  as  in  (9),  and  alternative  to,  as  in  (10)  —  are  illustrated  below: 

(8)  a.       At  bottom,  things  just  are  the  way  they  are,  a  heterogeneous 

reality.  Yet  parts  of  this  reality  have  the  capacity  for  perception, 
for  acquiring  information  from  other  parts,  and  an  accompanying 
capacity  for  acting  on  still  others, 
b.      Those  parts  having  the  capacity  for  perception  and  action  we 
call  organism.  (Ward  1985:279) 
OP:  We  call  (a  part  of  reality)  y  (y:  names  of  such  parts) 

(9)  a.       G:  So,  how  did  it  (prelims)  go? 

S:  The  historical  question,  I  had  some  problems  with,  but  I  think 
it's  ok. 
b.       S:  The  descriptive,  I  just  wrote  a  lot.  We'll  see.  (Ward  1985:280) 
OP:  I  did  (a  section  of  the  exam)  in  y  manner  (y:  a  way  of 
performing  the  exam) 

(10)  N:  Don't  you  feel  anything? 

M:  What  I  feel  I  control.  (Ward  1985:290) 

OP:  I  y  (y:  feel  or  control)  (some  part  of  what  can  potentially  be  felt) 

In  (8),  the  OP,  obtained  by  substituting  a  variable  for  the  focal  constituent  of  (8b) 

—  'we  call  (a  part  of  reality)  y  (y:  names  of  such  parts)'  —  relates  attributively  to 
(8a).  The  relationship  of  naming  is  not  saUent  as  a  result  of  being  previously 
mentioned,  but  because  the  act  of  naming  is  presupposed  by  the  existence  of 
certain  types  of  entities,  phenomena  or  acts. 

In  (9),  the  OP,  obtained  by  substituting  a  variable  for  the  focal  constituent  of 
(9b),  'I  did  (a  section  of  the  exam)  in  y  manner  (y:  a  way  of  performing  the  exam) 

—  is  prerequisite  to  taking  the  exam,  i.e.,  performing  the  exam  (or  some  part 


78  Studes  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

thereof  in  some  way)  is  implicit  in  the  taking  of  the  exam.  For  this  reason,  it  is 
infelicitous  to  state  the  presupposition  of  (lib)  in  the  context  of  (1  la): 

(1 1)  a.       G:  How  did  it  (preHminary  exams)  go? 

S:  I  had  some  problems  with  the  historical  question,  but  I  think  it 
is  okay, 
b.      #1  performed  some  part  of  the  exam  in  a  certain  way. 

In  (10),  the  OP,  obtained  by  substituting  a  variable  for  the  focal  constituent  of 
(lOM),  'I  y  (y:  feel  or  control)  (some  part  of  what  can  be  felt)'  —  implies  that  the 
potential  for  the  existence  of  the  alternative  states  of  feeling  or  controlling  is 
presupposed  by  (ION).  This  is  demonstrated  by  the  fact  that  it  is  infelicitous  to 
state  this  presupposition  in  the  context  of  (ION),  as  is  shown  in  (12): 

(12)  A:  Don't  you  feel  anything? 

B:  #  Either  I  feel  something  or  I  don't  feel  anything. 

The  final  significant  constraint  on  felicitous  English  preposing  is  that  there 
must  be  consonance  between  the  scalar  salient  relationships  of  preposed 
constituent  and  accompanying  proposition  (Tickoo  1992),  exemplified  in  (13) 
through  (16),  below: 

( 1 3)  a.       I  like  all  candy. 

b.       Other  food,  I  ^just  eat. 

(14)  a.       Hike  food. 

b.       #  Candy,  I  ^just  eat. 

(15)  a.       Hike  all  candy, 
b.      #  Food,  I  Wore. 

(16)  a.       Hike  all  food, 
b.       Candy,  I  Wore. 

In  (13b),  the  OP  bears  the  less  than  relationship  to  the  proposition  of  the  preceding 
clause,  and  its  accompanying  preposed  constituent  relates  as  the  less  palatable,  and 
merely  essential  whole  set,  to  the  more  palatable  and  desirable  element  of  this  set, 
of  the  preceding  clause.  There  is  consonance  between  the  relationship  of  whole 
set,  of  less  palatable  but  essential,  of  the  preposed  constituent,  and  the  less  than 
relationship  of  its  accompanying  OP,  and  therefore  preposing  of  (13b)  is  felicitous 
in  the  context  of  (13a).  The  reverse  is  not  true.  That  is,  given  that  I  like  the  whole 
set,  it  cannot  be  salient  that  I  merely  tolerate  an  element  of  it,  and  this  is  illustrated 
in  (14).  Similarly,  (15)  and  (16)  illustrate  that  element  of  set  to  whole  set  can 
accommodate  the  greater  than  relationship  (cf.  16b),  and  that  the  reserve  is  not  the 
case  (cf.  15b). 

To  summarize,  Enghsh  preposing  is  salient  given  with  functional  distribution 
into  preposed  constituent  and  OP.  Further,  there  is  consonance  between  the  scalar 
salient  relationships  of  these  constituents. 


TiCKOO:  On  Information  Packaging  and  Hearer  Engagement       79 

2.2.   Shared  knowledge  scalarity 

When  proposing  in  Kashmiri  is  salient,  it  is  also,  like  English  proposing, 
functionally  distributed  into  proposed  constituent  (PC)  and  OP,  with  consonance 
between  the  functions  of  these  constituents  (cf.  17). 

(17)  me    vuch  shiU     ti      sarla    amirakadal  pakan 

I       saw  Sheila  and  Sarla  Amirakadal  walking 
'I  saw  Sheila  and  Sarla  walking  at  Amirakadal.' 

Shili  (PC)  vuchim     ^godi 

Sheila        saw-I  first 

'I  saw  Sheila  fu"st,' 

ti  pati  vichim  sarli 
and  then  saw-I  Sarla 
'and  then  I  saw  Sarla.' 

However,  in  the  identifying,  more  encompassing,  set  of  shared  knowledge 
proposing  it  is  NOT  always  possible  to  identify  the  separate  scalar  relationships  of 
proposed  constituent  and  OP.  This  identifying  set  of  shared  knowledge  proposing 
realizes  the  less  given,  shared  knowledge  counterparts  of  salient  scalar 
relationships  which  constrain  felicitous  Enghsh  preposing  (cf.  18,  19  &  20). 

(18)  Shared  knowledge  attribution: 
totaa'n        ees      thiik       so 
until-then    was     all  right    she 
'Until  then  she  was  all  right.' 

^kath  (PC)  ees     karaan 
talk  was     doing 

'She  was  talking.' 

^baath  (PC)  ees      karaan 
talk  was      doing 

'She  was  talking.' 

^cai   eesin  ceemits 
tea    had     drunk 
'She  had  had  her  tea.' 

Mod  (PC)  oosun  coomut 
milk         had      drunk 
'She  had  had  her  milk.' 

(19)  Shared  knowledge  alternation: 
tem    pati     chi  palav 

that   after    are  clothes 
'Then  come  the  clothes.' 

n'av     palav    chi    suvnaavaan 
new      clothes  are    getting-made 
'They  are  getting  new  clothes  made.' 


80  Studes  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

preen  palav  (PC)    Vhini     tsinaan 

old      clothes  are-not    wearing 

'They  don't  wear  the  old  clothes.' 

(20)  Shared  knowledge  prerequisite  act: 

Tse       anthi  na'v     palav    khaandari    kheetri 

You     did-you-buy    new     clothes  wedding     for 
'Did  you  buy  new  clothes  for  the  wedding?' 

anha,  magar  pee(n)si  (PC)  gatsnam  aasin 

would-buy-them,  but      money  must        have 

'I  would  buy  them,  but  I  don't  have  the  money.' 

agar  nookri  miijim  tootaa'n 
if  job  will-get  by-then 
'I  get  a  job  by  then,' 

teli     ani 

then  will-get 

'then  I  will  get  them.' 

The  shared  knowledge  status  of  these  preposings  is  evident  in  the  fact  that  their 
OPs  can  be  felicitously  stated  and  denied  in  the  context  of  the  discourse  to  which 
they  are  bonded.  This  is  illustrated  in  (21),  using  the  example  of  (18): 

(21)  Until  then  she  was  fine. 

Statement  of  shared  knowledge:  She  was  doing  the  things  that  people 
do  when  they  are  well. 

Denial  of  shared  knowledge:  But  she  wasn't  doing  the  things  that 
people  generally  do  when  they  are  well. 

It  is  not  possible  to  state  or  deny  salient  OPs.  The  statement  of  the  presupposed 
OP,  obtained  by  substituting  a  variable  for  the  focal  constituent  of  the  preposing  of 
22b,  in  the  context  of  (22a),  is  redundant  and  the  denial  is  so  contrary  to 
expectation  that  it  describes  very  odd  behavior: 

(22)  a.       They  had  a  baby. 

b.      ^Tom  they  called  him. 

Statement  of  presupposition:  They  gave  him  a  name. 

Denial  of  presupposition:  But  they  did  not  give  him  a  name. 

The  difference  between  the  two  ways  to  the  realization  of  the  scalar 
relationships  of  attribution,  alternation,  and  prerequisite  to  is  the  fundamental 
difference  between  shared  knowledge  and  salient  given,  that  salient  given  is  an 
instance  of  what  is  already  assumed  to  be  in  association  with  the  proposition  to 
which  it  is  salient,  while  shared  knowledge  is  an  instance  of  what  is  merely 
common  knowledge  as  possible.  So,  shared  knowledge  attribution  is  only 
recognized  as  possible,  while  its  salient  manifestation  is  an  instance  of  an  inherent 
attribute.  In  (18),  chatting  away  when  one  is  well  is  probable  or  likely  but  not 
inevitable,  whereas  the  attributive  act  of  naming  is  inevitable  in  contexts  such  as 
(22a),  where  naming  is  inevitably  connected  to  the  event  of  having  a  baby. 


TiCKOO:  On  Information  Packaging  and  Hearer  Engagement       81 

We  can  demonstrate  the  greater  distance  of  the  shared  knowledge 
proposition  from  its  preceding  proposition  as  compared  to  the  salient  proposition 
and  its  preceding  proposition  by  juxtaposing  the  two  environments  in  which  a 
single  clause  instantiates  the  shared  knowledge  and  salient  versions  of  the  above- 
referred  to  propositional  relationships:  attribution,  alternation,  and  prerequisite  to. 

Shared  knowledge  attribution,  which  is  not  felicitous  in  preposed  version  in 
English  (cf.  23),  can  be  made  salient  by  altering  the  preceding  discourse  (cf.  24). 

(23)  Until  then  she  was  all  right. 

#  ^Tea  she  had  had./  She  had  had  tea. 

(24)  She  did  not  want  tea. 
But  tea  she  had  ^had. 

Juxtaposing  the  two  attributive  relationships  of  (23)  and  (24)  gives  us  1)  having 
had  tea  to  being  all  right,  and  2)  having  had  tea  to  not  wanting  tea,  and  clearly 
demonstrates  the  greater  distance  of  shared  knowledge  attribution  from  preceding 
proposition,  as  compared  to  the  relationship  between  salient  attribution  and  its 
preceding  proposition. 

Infelicitous  too  in  preposed  version  in  English  is  shared  knowledge 
alternation  (cf.  25).  To  make  this  alternation  salient  and,  therefore,  felicitous  in 
preposed  form,  the  preceding  context  is  modified  as  in  (26). 

(25)  After  that  come  the  clothes. 
They  get  new  clothes  made. 

#  The  old  clothes  they  ^don't  wear./  They  Mon't  wear  the  old  clothes. 

(26)  After  that  come  the  clothes. 
Everyone  buys  new  clothes. 

The  old  ones  they  simple  \hrow  away. 

Again,  simply  juxtaposing  1 )  not  wearing  old  clothes  to  buying  new  ones,  and  2) 
throwing  away  old  clothes  to  buying  new  ones  is  suggestive  of  the  greater  distance 
between  the  shared  knowledge  alternation  and  its  proposition,  as  compared  to  the 
salient  alternation  and  its  proposition. 

Like  the  attributive  and  alternative  relationships,  the  shared  knowledge 
relationship  of  prerequisite  to  is  infelicitous  in  English  preposing  (cf.  27).  To 
make  it  a  felicitous  preposing,  the  preceding  context  must  be  modified  as  in  (28): 

(27)  Will  you  buy  new  clothes  for  the  wedding? 

#  I  would,  but  the  money  I  Mon't  have. 

(28)  To  go  on  vacations  you  must  have  time  and  money. 
Money,  I  ^don't  have. 

Again,  simply  juxtaposing  the  two  versions  of  the  relationship  of  prerequisite  to  is 
suggestive  of  the  greater  distance  of  the  shared  knowledge  relationship  and 
preceding  proposition  compared  to  the  salient  relationship  and  preceding 
proposition:  1)  having  money  to  buying  new  clothes,  and  2)  having  money  to 
needing  money. 


82  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

The  above  examples  were  constructed  so  that  the  same  clause  would  relate 
back  with  a  single  relationship,  but  with  two  levels  of  givenness,  repeated  below: 

Attribution: 

shared  knowledge:  having  had  tea  to  the  state  of  being  well 

salient:  having  had  tea  to  not  wanting  it 

Alternation: 

shared  knowledge:  not  wearing  old  clothes  to  buying  new  ones 

salient:  throwing  away  old  clothes  to  buying  new  ones 

Prerequisite  to: 

shared  knowledge:  having  money  to  buying  new  clothes 

salient:  having  money  to  needing  money 

It  can  be  said  of  salient  preposing,  with  its  highly  constrained  relationship  to  the 
preceding  proposition,  that  it  marks  a  special  pragmatic  effect.  But  precisely 
because  of  its  high  degree  of  relatedness  to  its  preceding  proposition,  it  is  not  used 
repeatedly  in  successive  incrementations  for  the  purpose  of  effecting  text  building. 
Because  Kashmiri  allows  for  shared  knowledge  preposings,  and  scalar 
relationships  can,  therefore,  be  realized  by  means  of  a  much  wider  range  of 
information,  its  repeated  use  in  successive  incrementations  can  be  exploited  for 
text  building. 

2.3.   Shared  knowledge  scalarity  and  text  building 

To  appreciate  how  successive  preposings  are  used  to  effect  a  well-defined  type  of 
text  development,  it  is  important  to  acknowledge  two  basic  facts:  1)  that  an 
incrementation  bearing  a  given  relationship  to  the  preceding  proposition  does  not 
introduce  a  new  prepositional  point,  but  rather  sustains  the  preceding  proposition, 
merely  building  on  it  in  a  way  made  evident  by  the  scalar  relationship  it 
instantiates,  and  2)  that  successive  preposings,  building  one  segment  of  discourse, 
instantiate  the  same  scalar  relationship  to  a  single  sustained  preceding  proposition. 
This  is  illustrated  in  (29),  (30)  and  (31),  below.  In  (29),  the  repeated  use  of 
preposed  constructions,  bearing  the  scalar  relationship  of  alternation,  serves  to 
elaborate  on  only  one  prepositional  point  —  that  certain  predictable  actions  are 
taken  to  address  the  clothes  one  wears,  on  the  festive  occasion  being  described. 
More  specifically,  the  two  successive  preposings  state  1)  that  new  clothes  are 
made  and  2)  that  old  clothes  are  not  worn.  In  (30),  successive  preposings  are 
instantiations  of  the  scalar  relationship  of  attribution  to  one  prepositional  point  — 
that  the  queen  has  been  left  penniless.  More  specifically,  they  state  that  1)  the 
palace  was  taken  away  from  her,  2)  in  fact,  everything  was  taken  away  from  her, 
and  3)  that  she  became  extremely  poor.  Similarly,  in  (31),  successive  preposings, 
once  more,  instantiate  the  scalar  relationship  of  attribution  to  one  prepositional 
point  —  that  certain  wrong  doings  are  punished  with  a  term  of  imprisonment  in 
the  well.  They  specify  that  these  wrong  doings  are  1)  committing  theft,  2)  killing 
someone,  and  3)  other  things  of  this  nature.  In  general,  hence,  the  use  of  a 
succession  of  such  incrementations,  reaUzing  the  same  scalar  relationship,  sustains 
a  major  prepositional  point,  while  allowing  the  narrator  to  revise  it,  in  each 
incrementation,  to  amplify,  or  perhaps  alter,  or  rephrase  it. 


I 


TiCKOo:  On  Information  Packaging  and  Hearer  Engagement       83 

(29)  tern    pati    chi    palav 
that  after   are  clothes 
'Then  come  the  clothes.' 

n'av  palav       chi          suvnaavaan 
new  clothes  are-they    getting-made 
'They  get  new  clothes  made.' 

preen  palav  (PC)    Vhini    tsinaan 

old      clothes  are-not  wearing 

'They  don't  wear  the  old  clothes.' 

(30)  amis    gay      wyan  vari        kath    itaykin 
to-her  went  now    a  year    about  in  this  way 
'She  passed  a  year  in  this  way.' 

palas  (PC)    ti         nyuk 

palace        also  took-they-from-them 

'They  also  took  from  them  the  palace.' 

prath  kah  chiis  (PC)    nyuk 

each    one  thing  ,  .    took-they-frpm-them 
They  took  evefythmg  from  them. 

bilkul       gariib  (PC)  tayaar  gay    yi     bicha'r 
absolutely  poor    (PC)      became     this  poor-thing 
'This  poor  thing  became  very  poor.' 

(31)  ath  manz  a' s  tsinaan  timan  insaanan  yiman  aasihe    kosor      kormuth 
that  in  used  to  put-they  those  people   who   had   criminal-act  done 
'In  that  they  used  to  put  those  people  who  had  committed  some  crime.' 

tsuur  ka'rmits 
theft  done 
'Committed  theft.' 

kah         mormuk 
someone  killed 
'Killed  someone.' 

ithii  chiiz 

this-kind-of  thing 
'This  kind  of  thing' 

At  each  such  incrementation,  the  hearer  knows  not  only  the  sustained  proposition, 
but  also  the  scalar  relationship  that  is  being  used  to  amplify  it.  This  also  means 
s/he  knows  of  the  set  of  possible  realizations  of  the  scalar  relationship  from  which 
the  narrator  must  choose  in  order  to  properly  introduce  the  new  sentential 
component,  at  each  incrementation.  When  such  a  means  to  text  building  is 
adopted,  the  role  of  the  interlocutor  is  somewhat  different  from  his/her  standard 
function  as  information  processor  and  receiver.  His/her  knowledge  not  only  of  the 
given  proposition,  but  also  of  the  well-defined  and  constrained  way  in  which  the 
narrator  can  add  new  information  makes  him/her  qualify  better  as  an  informed. 


84  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

rather  than  uninformed,  participant  in  the  communicative  act  of  narration.  Recent 
literature  on  oral  narrative  has  suggested  that  narration  between  informed 
participants  has,  as  one  might  expect,  the  potential  to  be  a  more  cooperative, 
collective  and  therefore  dialogic  process  (cf.  Goodwin  1987;  Mandelbaum  1987; 
Nofsinger  1999).  Manipulating  information  presentation  in  successive 
incrementations  to  set  up  the  interlocutor  as  informed,  and  to  maintain  this 
informed  state  of  being,  puts  in  place  what  is  needed  to  facilitate  dialogic 
narration,  and  creates  the  illusion,  at  least,  of  making  the  interlocutor  an  active 
participant  in  the  process  of  narration.  It  seems  to  me  that  this  is  a  strategy  devised 
to  draw  and  hold  the  attention  of  an  otherwise  passive  interlocutor  in  what  is 
essentially  a  monologic  process  of  communication. 

3.      The  verb-initial  clause  and  the  given  proposition 

In  the  second  type  of  highly  given  proposition,  what  the  hearer  has  knowledge  of, 
at  the  time  of  the  utterance,  is  that  one  of  a  very  small  set  of  clausal  events  that  can 
appear  in  the  context  of  the  preceding  event  will  do  so.  (This  is  true,  for  example, 
of  each  of  the  clauses  of  32b-h.) 

(32)  a.       ati       vichin     gume  hinz    led 

there  saw-she  horse  of    manure 
'There,  she  saw  horse  manure.' 

b.  ti  tujin  yi 
and     picked  up      this 
'and  she  picked  it  up' 
emi        manz  kadin 
from-it    in       took-out 
'From  it  she  took  out' 

c.  kadin  emi  manzan  mishki 
took-out  from-it  in  barley 
'From  it  she  took  out  some  barley.' 

d.  ka'rin  safaa  yina  yi 
did  clean-then  this-one  this 
'She  cleaned  it.' 

pyaanis  manz    chajin 
water      in        cleaned-them 
'She  washed  it  in  water' 
ti      pati    gay      gretas  pet 
and  then  went    mill     on 
'and  then  she  went  to  the  mill' 

e.  ti        annin  pihith 
and     got-them    ground 
'and  had  it  ground.' 

f.  bonoovun  thooda  oot 
made         a-little    flour. . . 
'She  made  a  little  flour' 

g.  ti       biit  akis  jayi    kuhs  tal 


TiCKOO:  On  Information  Packaging  and  Hearer  Engagement       85 

and  sat   one   place  tree   under 
'and  she  sat  somewhere,  under  a  tree' 
h.      ti     bona'vin     yim    zi      rootiha'n 
and    made        these  two  flat-breads 
'and  made  two  pieces  of  flat  bread.' 

This  creates  anticipation  of  the  new  selection  from  the  known  set.  In  other  words, 
we  can  say  that,  at  the  time  of  the  utterance,  the  hearer  KNOWS  THE  PROPOSITION 
IN  TERMS  OF  ITS  TYPE,  and  s/he  anticipates  the  specific  token  of  this  type.  Such  a 
given  proposition  is  formally  marked  by  the  use  of  a  verb-initial  clause  (that  is,  a 
clause  with  tensed  verb  in  initial  position,  cf.  32).  (In  preposing,  by  contrast,  the 
HEARER  KNOWS  THE  PROPOSITION  —  BOTH  THE  TYPE  AND  THE  TOKEN  —  and  the 

new  component  is  an  amplification  of  a  dimension  of  it.)  A  string  of  sentential 
incrementations  in  VS  order,  hence,  serves  to  create,  and  fulfill,  a  succession  of 
expectations  about  the  narrative  event  sequence. 

In  the  text  preceding  the  extract  of  (32),  the  reader  is  informed  that  the 
protagonist  of  the  story  —  a  former  queen,  who  has  been  reduced  to  a  state  of  dire 
need  —  is  in  search  of  ways  of  making  root,  the  special  bread  that  is  made  and 
distributed  to  people  on  the  festive  occasion  being  described  in  the  story.  The 
clause  preceding  the  string  of  VS  clauses  informs  us  that  she  comes  upon  some 
horse  manure.  Then  in  successive  VS  clauses,  we  have  the  following  events,  each 
anticipated  by  the  interlocutor,  at  the  time  of  its  utterance,  as  one  of  a  very  finite 
set  of  events  that  the  hearer  knows  must  occur  in  the  context  of  its  preceding 
discourse:  she  picked  it  up,  she  took  out  some  barley  from  it,  she  cleaned  it,  she 
got  it  ground,  she  made  a  little  flour,  she  sat  somewhere  under  a  tree,  and  she 
made  two  roots  (pieces  of  bread). 

(33)  a.  tem  dop  yakdam  anuyn  haspital 
he  said  at  once  bring-him  hospital 
'He  said  bring  him  to  the  hospital  straight  away.' 

b.  bas  ga'y  a's  wa'n  ekdam 
went  we  now  at-once 
'So  we  left  at  once.' 

c.  ba'gaash  ti  bi  ga'y 
Bhagash  and  I  went 
'Bhagash  and  I  left.' 

d.  va'ta's   vaapass   myon   gari 
arrived    back        my       home 
'We  arrived  at  my  home.' 

e.  von     timan       ithka'n    chi    daliil 
said    to-them  this-way     is      problem 
'We  told  them  this  is  what  the  problem  is.' 

f.  tul  su 
picked  up  him 
'We  picked  him  up.' 

g.  tov  tangas  pet 
put-him  horse-driven  carriage    on 


86  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

'We  put  him  in  a  horse-driven  carriage.' 
h.       ti      gay     a's    vaapas  haspitai 
and  went  we   back     hospital 
'And  we  went  back  to  the  hospital.' 

In  the  extract  of  (33),  the  narrator  is  told  by  the  doctor  that  the  protagonist  of  the 
story  (who  has  suddenly  taken  ill)  must  be  brought  to  the  hospital.  This  is  reported 
in  (33a).  Then  in  successive  VS  clauses,  the  following  events  are  presented:  we 
left  immediately,  we  arrived  at  my  home,  we  told  them  what  the  problem  was,  we 
picked  him  (the  patient)  up,  we  put  him  in  a  horse-driven  carriage,  and  we 
returned  to  the  hospital.  Each  one  of  these  events  is  anticipated  by  the  hearer,  at 
the  time  of  its  utterance  as  one,  of  a  very  finite  set  of  events,  that  must  occur  in  the 
context  of  the  preceding  discourse.  We  saw  earlier  that  in  a  succession  of 
preposings,  the  sustained  thread  of  discourse  —  that  is,  the  sustained  given 
component  —  is  a  major  propositional  point.  The  sustained  thread  of  discourse 
effected  by  the  use  of  a  succession  of  VS  clauses  is  a  string  of  propositional  types; 
and  hence  the  anticipation  in  succession  of  the  (new)  realization  of  each  of  these 
known  types. 

Here,  the  device  quite  transparently  effects  greater  hearer  engagement,  by 
manipulating  information  presentation  in  successive  incrementations  so  that  the 
use  of  hearer-given  information  enables  and  encourages  the  hearer  to  make 
predictions  about  the  forthcoming  new  information.  As  in  preposing,  by  being 
made  a  more,  rather  than  less,  informed  participant,  the  hearer  is  able  to  feel  more 
actively  involved  in  the  process  of  narration.  The  standard  interlocutor  role  as 
information  processor  and  receiver  is  added  to  by  his/her  function  as  predictor  and 
anticipator  of  the  next  sequenced  event. 

4.       Conclusion 

The  disproportionately  large  number  of  segments  of  Kashmiri  oral  narrative  that 
are  built  out  of  one  or  the  other  of  these  two  types  of  highly  given  sentential 
propositions  suggests  that  information  in  Kashmiri  oral  narrative  is  strategically 
packaged  to  increase  hearer  engagement,  specifically  because  this  is  a  challenge  in 
an  essentially  monologic  communicative  process.  It  is  also  true  that  this 
information  packaging,  along  with  its  formal  marking,  is  only  found  in  the  context 
of  oral  narration.  It  is  not  produced,  for  example,  in  a  simple  translation  exercise, 
from  English  to  Kashmiri. 


TiCKOO:  On  Information  Packaging  and  Hearer  Engagement       87 

APENDIX:  Randomly  selected  extract  from  a  recording  of  a  Kashmiri 
oral  narrative 

akis      mulkas   manz   oos    yi      baadshaa 
one-to  country     in        was  this      king 

temisinz    zanaan  aa's      prath  vari     pan  divaan 

his  wife    used  to  every  year   carry  out  certain  ritual  practices  on  a  particular 

festive  occasion 

ti     em     kor   sooriy  tayaar 

and  she    did     everything   ready 

karinyim    root     thayaar  VS 

did     these  breads  ready 

korun     pati        puuza  VS 

did    after  that     puja 

ti      puuza      karith  karin  kath  vath  VS 

and  puja   having-done      did    talk 

ti      pathi  dyutin  yi         navvid  sarini 

and  then    gave   this  blessed-food    everyone-to 

godnethan  gay     emis  panis     riinis,     yus  mahraj  oos,  pathsha  oos 
first  went  to  him  her   husband,  who  king  was,    king     was 

temis    gay  naviid  heth 

to-him  went     blessed-food      with  P 

ti     su    oos    ni  zyaadi  karaan  pats    vats  keh  ti  yiman  chiizan  manz 
and  he  was  not   a  lot    doing   belief    at  all  these   things   in 

eym   tul  yi    naviid 

he    picked  up   this   blessed-food 

ti     dyutun  buutan  pet  barith  VS 

and   threw    shoes  on  dropped 

bus  retshenaa       gay 

as  one  might  expect   a  little  while  passed 

ti        apayri          aav      aalaan 

and   from-there  came  announcement 

donduur  vool  aav 
town      crier   came 

ti    tem  ditsi    kraki     ki     baadsha  hasa  nin         ratith 
and  he  gave  a  cry  that    king        will-take    captured 

ti       tsinas  sihaajihas  manz  VS 

and  will-put-him  well  in 


88  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

ti      bas  retsihenaa    gay 

and  as  one  might  expect  a  little  time  passed 

ti       aay       yim  VS 

and    came  these    guards 

ti      niyuk  yi    badshaa  retith  VS 

and  took  this  king       captured 

ti  tsinuk  yi  sihajaahas  VS 

and  put  him  well         in 

ath  manz  aa's  tsinan  timan  insaanan  yiman  aasihe  kosur  kormuth 
that  in      were  putting  those  people    who    had     crime  done 

tsuur  karmitsan  P 

theft  done 

kah  mormuk  P 

someone  killed 

ithiy  chiiz 
such  things 

yi  tsunuk  raji     ti    ath    manz  P 

this-one  put      king  also  that  in 

ti      yi  zanaan  aa's  ... 
and  this  wife  was  . . . 

yi     gay  pareshaan 

she  became    very  worried 

saaripaa'si  vaasi     gay        katham 
all      money  became  finished 

niyak         paa'si  vaa'si  VS 

took-way    money 

gay         bikaar  tayaar  VS 

became  beggar 

yi    gay        vati  vati 
she  went  street  street 

vati    vati        ees  feeraan  P 

street  street  was  wondering 

beechan  ti    kevaan 
begging  and  eating 

ti      seta    ees    vadaan  P 

and  a  lot  was  crying 

ti     veets       akis  gara    manz  VS 

and  arrived  one  house  in 


TicKoo:  On  Information  Packaging  and  Hearer  Engagement       89 

amis   gay       wyanvari  kath    ithaykin  dharbidhar 
to-her  became  now  year  about  like-this  vagabond-like 

palas    ti      nyuuk  P 

palace  also  took-from-them 

prath  kah  chiiz  nyuuk  P 

everything  took-from-them 

bilkul      garib  tayaar  gay     yi     bichaar  P 

absolutely  poor       became  this   poor-thing 

ti     pati    aa'spakaan 
and  then  was  walking 

yi    aa's  sakith  tachmits 
she  was  very    tired 

ti     beyi  aa's   yina   yi... 
and  also  was   you   know  ... 

tresh     aa'sis  lajmits  P 

thirst  was-to-her    felt 

bochi     lajmits  P 

hunger   felt-to-her 

vaathan,  vaathan,  vaa'ts  akis  garas  nishan 

getting-there,  getting-there  arrived  one  house  near 


90  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

REFERENCES 

ALPORD,  Dan  et  al.  (eds.).  1984  Proceedings  of  the  Seventh  Annual  Meeting,  of 

the  Berkeley  Linguistics  Society.  Berkeley,  CA:  Berkeley  Linguistics 

Society. 
Bland,  Susan.  1980.  Topic/comment  sentences  in  English.  Cornell  University, 

MS. 
Cole,  Peter,  (ed.).  1981.  Radical  Pragmatics.  New  York:  Academic  Press. 
Crieder,  Chet  A.  1979.  On  the  explanation  of  transformations.  In:  Givon  (ed),  3- 

22. 
Davison,  Alice.  1984.  Syntactic  markedness  and  the  definition  of  sentence  topic. 

Language  60:4.797-846. 
Givon,  Talmy.  (ed.).  1979.  Syntax  and  Semantics  12:  Discourse  and  Syntax.  New 

York:  Academic  Press. 
.  1984.  Syntax:  A  functional-typological  introduction.  Vol.  1.  Amsterdam:  J. 

Benjamins. 
Goodwin,  Charles.  1987.  Forgetfulness  as  an  interactive  resource.  Social 

Psychology  Quarterly  50.1 15-30. 
GUNDEL,  Jeanette.  1974.  The  role  of  topic  and  comment  in  linguistic  theory. 

University  of  Texas  at  Austin,  Ph.D  dissertation  in  Linguistics. 
Halliday,  Michael  A.  K.  1967.  Notes  on  transitivity  and  theme  in  English.  Part 

2.  Journal  of  Linguistics  3.199-244. 
Langacker,  Robert.  1974.  Movement  rules  in  functional  perspective.  Language 

50.630-64. 
Mandelbaum,  Jenny.  1987.  Couples  sharing  stories.  Communication  Quarterly 

35.144-70. 
NOFSINGER,  Robert  E.  1999.  Everyday   Conversation.  Prospect  Heights,  IL: 

Waveland  Press. 
Prince,  Ellen  F.  1981a.  Toward  a  taxonomy  of  given-new  information.  In:  Cole 

(ed.),  223-55. 
.    1981b.  Topicalization,  focus-movement,  and  Yiddish-movement:  A 

pragmatic  differentiation.  In:  Alford  et  al.  (eds.),  249-64. 
.  1984.  Topicalization  and  left-dislocation:  A  functional  analysis.  In  White  & 

Teller  (eds.),  213-25. 
Reinhart,  Tanya.  1981.  Pragmatics  and  linguistics:  An  analysis  of  sentence 

topics.  Philosophica  27.53-94. 
Rodman,  Robert.  1974.  On  left  dislocation.  Papers  in  Linguistics  7.437-66. 
TiCKOO,  Asha.  1992.  On  preposing  and  word  order  rigidity.  Pragmatics  2:4.467- 

86. 
Ward,  Gregory.  1985.  The  semantics  and  pragmatics  of  preposing.  University  of 

Pennsylvania,  Ph.D  dissertation  in  Linguistics. 
White,  S.   J.,   &   V.   Teller,  (eds.).   1984.  Annals  of  New  York  Academy  of 

Sciences,  Volume  433:  Discourses  in  Reading  and  Linguistics.  New  York: 

The  New  York  Academy  of  Sciences. 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences 
Volume  32,  Number  2  (Fall  2002) 


REVIEW 


Jeffrey  C.  King:  Complex  Demonstratives:  A  Quantificational  Account. 
Cambridge,  Mass.:  MIT  Press,  2001.  Pp.  xiii+207.  Price:  (cloth)  $50.00, 
ISBN  0-262-11263-9;  (paper)  $20.00,  ISBN  0-262-61169-4. 

Peter  Lasersohn 

University  of  Illinois  at  Urbana-Champaign 

lasersoh  @  uiuc.edu 

David  Kaplan's  classic  paper  'Demonstratives',  published  in  1989  after  more  than 
a  decade  of  circulation  in  manuscript,  seemed  to  establish  demonstratives  as 
perhaps  the  clearest  and  least  controversial  example  of  'directly  referring'  terms: 
contributing  an  individual  —  but  no  further  descriptive  material  —  to  the  semantic 
content  of  sentences  in  which  they  occur,  modally  rigid,  and  non-quantificational. 
Kaplan's  original  formalism  modeled  only  'simple'  demonstratives,  consisting  of 
this  or  that  with  no  accompanying  common  noun;  but  one  might  naturally  expect 
'complex'  demonstratives  such  as  this  book  or  that  man  wearing  the  yellow  shirt 
to  be  semantically  similar,  and  indeed  analyses  such  as  those  in  Braun  (1994)  or 
Borg  (2000)  defend  exactly  this  view,  allowing  the  descriptive  material  of  such 
expressions  to  play  a  role  in  the  character,  but  not  the  content,  of  sentences  in 
which  they  appear.  King's  book  challenges  this  view  on  all  counts,  presenting  a 
detailed  defense  of  the  view  that  complex  demonstratives  are  quantificational 
expressions  rather  than  singular  terms,  with  non-rigid  uses  in  which  their 
descriptive  material  forms  part  of  the  content  of  the  larger  sentence. 

The  heart  of  King's  case  is  the  existence  of  certain  uses  of  complex 
demonstratives  which  seem  difficult  or  impossible  to  account  for  in  a  direct 
reference  analysis.  Prominent  among  these  is  the  'no  demonstration  no  speaker 
refereiKe'  use,  illustrated  in  examples  like  (1),  uttered  by  a  speaker  who  does  not 
know  who  scored  one  hundred  on  the  exam,  but  only  that  exactly  one  student  did 
so: 

(1)     That  student  who  scored  one  hundred  on  the  exam  is  a  genius. 

The  demonstrative  here  seems  entirely  natural,  but  the  speaker  would  not  seem  to 
have  any  particular  individual  in  mind  as  the  referent  of  the  phrase.  Through  a 
complex  but  careful  series  of  arguments.  King  shows  that  various  strategies  for 
dealing  with  such  examples  in  a  direct  reference  approach  lead  to  significant 
problems.  Additional  problems  for  direct  reference  analyses  come  from 
'quantification  in'  examples,  in  which  the  demonstrative  contains  a  variable  bound 


Thanks  to  Gary  Ebbs,  Lenny  Clapp  and  the  other  members  of  lUinois  Program  for  Research  in  the 
Humanities  reading  group  on  'Demonstratives  and  Concepts'  for  many  interesting  discussions  of  King's 
book,  and  to  Jeffrey  King,  for  his  helpful  presentation  to  the  reading  group. 

©  2005  Peter  Lasersohn 


92  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

by  a  quantifier  outside  the  demonstrative,  as  in  (2),  and  from  Bach-Peters 
examples  such  as  (3): 

(2)  Most  avid  snow  skiers  remember  that  first  black  diamond  run  they 
attempted  to  ski. 

(3)  Every  friend  of  yours  who  studied  for  it  passed  that  math  exam  she  was 
dreading. 

Alongside  these  semantic  arguments.  King  suggests  that  complex 
demonstratives  behave  syntactically  like  quantificational,  rather  than  referential, 
noun  phrases:  they  allow  antecedent-contained  deletion,  as  in  (4): 

(4)  Tiger  birdied  that  hole  that  Michael  did. 

They  also  show  weak  crossover  effects,  so  that  (5)  cannot  be  interpreted  with  his 
anaphoric  to  that  man  with  the  goatee: 

(5)  His  mother  loves  that  man  with  the  goatee. 

King  suggests  that  these  patterns  show  that  complex  demonstratives  undergo 
quantifier  raising  at  LF. 

King  shows  considerably  more  sophistication  about  natural  language  syntax 
than  much  of  the  philosophical  literature  on  demonstratives,  but  these  arguments 
are  not  unassailable.  Analyses  of  antecedent-contained  deletion  are  available 
which  do  not  depend  on  quantifier  raising  (Baltin  1987).  In  addition,  some 
constructions  that  do  not  clearly  involve  quantification  still  show  weak  crossover 
effects:  for  example,  intonational  focus  (Chomsky  1976).  Example  (6),  with  focus 
on  loves,  allows  a  reading  where  his  is  anaphoric  to  John,  but  (7),  with  focus  on 
John,  does  not: 

(6)  His  mother  LOVES  John. 

(7)  His  mother  loves  JOHN. 

My  own  intuition  is  that  (5)  improves  considerably  if  focus  is  placed  on  the  verb, 
so  the  crossover  effect  in  this  example  may  have  less  to  do  with  the 
quantificational  status  of  complex  demonstratives  than  with  the  syntax  of  focus 
marking. 

Having  presented  arguments  against  a  direct  reference  account  and  in  favor 
of  a  quantificational  account  of  complex  demonstratives.  King  proceeds  to 
develop  a  detailed  quantificational  analysis.  Starting  from  a  relatively  simple  view, 
he  introduces  complications  by  stages,  eventually  arriving  at  the  claim  that  the 

determiner  that  denotes  a  four-place  relation and are  uniquely in  an 

object  X  and  x  is .  The  first  argument  place  is  for  the  property  denoted  by  the 

common  noun  phrase  with  which  that  combines;  the  final  argument  place  is  for 
the  property  denoted  by  the  scope.  The  second  and  third  argument  places  are  filled 
pragmatically  according  to  the  intentions  of  the  speaker;  different  ways  of  fiUing 
them  give  rise  to  different  readings  for  the  complex  demonstrative. 

If  the  speaker  utters  the  complex  demonstrative  with  a  'perceptual  intention' 
—  that  is,  if  the  speaker  perceives  a  particular  individual  b  in  his  or  her  physical 


Lasersohn:  Review  of  King  93 

environment  and,  in  using  the  demonstrative,  intends  to  talk  about  b  —  then  the 
second  argument  place  of  that  is  filled  with  the  property  is  identical  to  b.  This 
allows  the  complex  demonstrative  to  mimic  specific  reference  to  b,  despite  its 
quantificational  semantics.  It  should  be  noticed  here  that  although  the  choice  of  b 
depends  on  the  perceptions  of  the  speaker,  the  property  is  identical  to  b  involves  b 
itself,  not  perceptions  of  ^,  so  the  demonstrative  retains  a  kind  of  direct 
correspondence  to  b  despite  King's  rejection  of  the  direct  reference  approach. 
Opponents  of  the  whole  idea  of  directness  of  reference  will  therefore  probably  not 
find  King  to  be  as  clear  an  ally  as  they  might  have  hoped. 

A  more  'indirect'  reading  is  obtained  if  the  speaker  utters  the  demonstrative 
with  a  'descriptive  intention'  —  that  is,  if  he  or  she  believes  that  there  is  some 
individual  that  uniquely  possesses  a  certain  property  P,  and  intends  to  talk  about 
that  individual,  as  in  the  'no  demonstration  no  speaker  reference'  use  described 
above.  In  this  case,  the  second  argument  place  of  that  is  filled  with  P.  Typically 
(though  not  always),  P  will  be  the  property  denoted  by  the  common  noun  phrase 
with  which  that  combines;  in  other  words,  the  very  same  property  which  fills  the 
first  argument  place.  This  renders  the  second  argument  completely  redundant, 
standing  idly  by  but  doing  no  semantic  work  —  a  somewhat  odd  feature  of  the 
analysis,  but  one  which  seems  necessary  if  a  completely  unified  treatment  of  that 
is  to  be  maintained. 

The  third  argument  place  in  the  semantics  of  that  may  be  filled  either  with 
are  jointly  instantiated,  or  with  are  jointly  instantiated  in  w,  t,  where  w,  t  are  the 
world  and  time  of  the  context  of  use.  The  latter  choice  effectively  renders  the 
content  of  the  common  noun  argument  of  that  irrelevant  to  modal  evaluation  of 
the  sentence  in  which  it  occurs.  For  example,  sentence  (8)  may  be  interpreted  as  in 
(9): 

(8)  That  guy  driving  the  red  Blazer  is  smart. 

(9)  Guy  driving  the  red  Blazer  and  is  identical  to  b  are  uniquely  jointly 
instantiated  in  w,  t  in  an  object  x  and  x  is  smart. 

On  this  reading,  the  sentence  will  require  that  b,  the  object  of  the  speaker's 
perceptual  intention,  be  a  guy  driving  the  red  Blazer  in  the  world  and  time  of  the 
utterance,  but  the  sentence  will  be  true  in  all  those  worlds  in  which  b  is  smart, 
regardless  of  whether  &  is  a  guy  driving  the  red  Blazer  in  those  worlds.  This  part 
of  the  analysis  is  surprisingly  reminiscent  of  those  analyses  which  allow  the 
descriptive  material  of  the  complex  demonstrative  to  contribute  to  character  but 
not  content,  though  of  course  this  terminology  is  not  used.  Here  again,  opponents 
of  the  whole  idea  of  direct  reference  may  find  themselves  disappointed. 

If  the  third  argument  place  of  that  is  filled  simply  with  are  jointly 
instantiated,  and  if  the  sentence  is  uttered  with  a  descriptive  intention,  then  we 
obtain  a  modally  non-rigid  interpretation,  in  which  the  descriptive  material  of  the 
complex  demonstrative  must  be  satisfied  in  every  world  in  which  the  sentence  is 
true.  For  example,  (10)  may  be  interpreted  as  (1 1): 

(10)  That  student  who  scored  one  hundred  on  the  exam  is  a  genius. 


94  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

(11)  Student  who  scored  one  hundred  on  the  exam  and  student  who  scored 
one  hundred  on  the  exam  are  uniquely  jointly  instantiated  in  an  object  x 
and  X  is  a  genius. 

On  this  reading,  the  sentence  will  be  true  at  those  times  and  worlds  in  which  there 
is  a  unique  student  who  scored  one  hundred  on  the  exam  —  potentially  a  different 
student  in  different  worlds  —  and  that  student  is  a  genius. 

With  this  analysis  in  place,  King  proceeds  to  explore  the  interaction  of 
demonstratives  with  modals,  negation,  and  verbs  of  prepositional  attitude;  to 
defend  his  analysis  against  an  alternative  which  would  claim  that  complex 
demonstratives  are  ambiguous  between  directly  referring  and  quantificational 
uses;  and  to  address  various  details  and  'loose  ends'  of  his  account.  The  book 
concludes  with  a  brief  formal  fragment  illustrating  the  analysis. 

Proponents  of  direct  reference  theories  will  no  doubt  find  ways  to  poke  holes 
in  many  of  King's  semantic  arguments,  just  as  LF  syntacticians  may  poke  holes  in 
some  of  his  syntactic  arguments.  That  having  been  said,  I  think  no  one  will  deny 
that  this  book  provides  a  major  contribution  to  the  study  of  demonstratives,  and 
has  advanced  the  level  of  the  discussion  considerably.  King  examines  a  much 
broader  range  of  data  than  previous  treatments,  argues  his  case  closely  and 
carefully,  develops  his  analysis  at  an  unusual  level  of  detail,  and  works  through 
the  consequences  thoroughly.  I  think  it  is  fair  to  say  that  this  book  will  set  the 
standard  for  subsequent  treatments. 

Beyond  its  importance  in  the  study  of  demonstratives,  this  book  provides  a 
model  for  work  at  the  interface  of  Unguistics  and  philosophy  —  an  area  which  is 
currently  undergoing  a  kind  of  renaissance.  It  deserves  a  wide  readership,  not  just 
among  specialists  in  the  semantics  of  demonstratives,  but  among  philosophically- 
oriented  linguists  and  linguistically-oriented  philosophers  more  generally. 

REFERENCES 

Almog,  Joseph,  John  Perry,  &  Howard  Wettstein  (eds.).  1989.  Themes  from 

Kaplan.  Oxford:  Oxford  University  Press. 
Baltin,  Mark.  1987.  Do  antecedent-contained  deletions  exist?  Linguistic  Inquiry 

18.579-95. 
BORG,  Emma.  2000.  Complex  demonstratives.  Philosophical  Studies  97.229-49. 
Braun,   David.    1994.   Structured   character  and   complex   demonstratives. 

Philosophical  Studies  74.193-219. 
Chomsky,  Noam.  1976.  Conditions  on  rules  of  grammar.  Linguistic  Analysis 

2.303-51. 
Kaplan,  David.  1989.  Demonstratives.  In:  Almog,  Perry  8c  Wettstein  (eds.),  481- 

563. 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences 
Volume  32,  Number  2  (Fall  2002) 


REVIEW 


Saran  Kaur  Gill:  English  Language  Challenges  for  Malaysia:  International 
Communication.  Serdang:  Universiti  Putra  Malaysia  Press,  2002.  Pp. 
132.  Price:  $24.00,  ISBN  9832373522. 

James  H.  Yang 

University  of  Illinois  at  Urbana-Champaign 

hyang5@uiuc.edu 

Gill's  main  argument  is  to  propose  Standard  Malaysian  English  to  meet  the  needs 
for  national  identity  and  international  intelligibility.  Gill  remarks  that  Malaysians' 
average  English  skills  have  been  relapsing  since  Malay  promoted  Bahasa  Malaysia 
as  the  main  medium  of  instruction  in  schools  in  1969  and  later  at  the  university 
level  in  1983  (p.  38).  Specifically,  she  points  out  that  after  the  colonial  era,  the 
number  of  acrolectal  English  speakers  has  decreased  considerably.  By  contrast,  the 
number  of  mesolectal  and  basilectal  English  speakers  has  increased  greatly  in 
Malaysia  (p.  52).  Accordingly,  she  proposes  to  improve  Malaysians'  English  skills 
to  enhance  national  competitiveness  in  technological  advancement  and  global 
markets. 

However,  she  found  that  it  is  inadequate  to  continue  to  adopt  Standard 
British  English  as  the  pedagogical  norm.  This  inadequacy  is  due  to  the  following 
reasons.  First,  it  is  almost  linguistically  impossible  for  adult  learners  of  English  to 
attain  native-like  accents.  She  argues  that  it  is  practical  to  adopt  the  local  educated 
variety  of  English  as  a  teaching  model.  Furthermore,  Malaysian  inhabitants  cannot 
identify  themselves  with  exonormative  discourse  practices  and  sociocultural 
values  associated  with  the  UK.  Since  Malaysia  became  independent  of  the  UK  on 
31  August  1957,  there  have  been  strong  feeUngs  of  antagonism  against  English, 
and  the  government  has  taken  measures  to  disestablish  it  (p.  25).  Most  crucially, 
talk  practices  are  part  of  culture,  embodying  national  identities.  Accordingly,  Gill 
asserts  that  it  is  more  appropriate  to  adopt  the  local  educated  variety  of  English  as 
a  teaching  model  for  Malaysians. 

In  fact,  the  findings  of  Gill's  questionnaire  demonstrate  that  her  fellow 
nationals  prefer  their  educated  English  variety  to  Standard  British  English  for  their 
pedagogical  norm.  Gill  found  that  85%  of  her  Malaysian  informants  approve  of 
Standard  Malaysian  English  as  the  most  suitable  pedagogical  model  of  English  in 
Malaysia.  British  English  with  a  Received  Pronunciation  (RP)  accent,  by 
comparison,  is  perceived  by  73%  of  the  respondents  to  be  the  second  suitable 
model.  Apparently,  a  local  standard  variety  of  English  is  emerging  in  Malaysia  as 
many  people  realize  that  their  local  standard  variety  of  English  represents  part  of 
their  national  identities  and  cultures. 


©  2005  James  H.  Yang 


96  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences  32:2  (Fall  2002) 

What,  then,  is  Standard  Malaysian  English?  What  is  the  difference  between 
Standard  Malaysian  EngUsh  and  Standard  British  English?  Gill  defines  (p.  29) 
Standard  Malaysian  EngUsh  as  a  variety  of  English,  where  as  far  as  phonology  is 
concerned,  there  is  slight  variation  tolerated  so  long  as  it  is  internationally 
inteUigible;  in  terms  of  syntax,  no  deviation  is  tolerated  at  all,  and  with  regard  to 
lexis,  variation  is  acceptable  only  for  words  which  have  no  sociocultural 
equivalents  in  Enghsh. 

Gill  also  examines  the  use  of  English  in  Malaysia.  She  found  that  Standard 
Malaysian  English  or  acrolectal  English  is  used  at  formal  presentations  on  behalf 
of  companies  (p.  78).  In  addition.  Standard  Malaysian  English  is  employed  in 
radio  advertisements  to  give  a  brief  announcement  of  an  advertised  product.  Local 
basilectal  and  acro-mesolectal  varieties  of  English  are,  by  contrast,  often  used  by 
advertisers  to  capture  listeners'  attention  because  most  Malaysians  speak  those 
varieties  in  daily  conversations.  Accordingly,  advertisers  draw  on  popular 
colloquial  varieties  of  EngUsh  to  create  the  images  of  friendliness,  reminding  the 
audience  that  their  products  are  designed  for  everyday  use.  Put  simply,  each  local 
variety  of  English  is  linked  with  different  language  ideologies,  and  advertisement 
agencies  employ  different  local  English  varieties  as  strategies  to  create  desired 
impressions  and  promote  their  products  and  services. 

Finally,  Gill  proposes  Standard  Malaysian  English  as  the  medium  of 
instruction  for  higher  education  to  attain  the  three  goals,  set  by  Datuk  Seri  Dr. 
Mahathir  Mohamad,  the  Prime  Minister  of  Malaysia  (p.  Ill): 

1)  For  Malaysia  to  remain  competitive  at  the  international  level 

2)  To  enhance  Malaysians'  efficiency  and  capability  associated  with  English 
skills 

3)  To  keep  up  the  pace  of  translation  with  the  generation  of  knowledge  and 
information  in  the  field  of  science  and  technology 

However,  in  my  opinion,  some  realities  need  careful  consideration  before  a  local 
acrolectal  variety  of  English  is  adopted  as  the  medium  of  instruction  for  higher 
education  in  countries  where  English  is  taught  as  a  second  and/or  foreign 
language.  First,  many  teachers,  except  for  English  teachers,  might  not  be 
competent  to  speak  local  acrolectal  English  fluently  and  might  not  well  explain 
complex  and  abstract  ideas  in  English  to  their  students.  Second,  while  teachers 
might  use  and  speak  acrolectal  English,  many  students  might  not  have  developed 
necessary  skills  in  listening  comprehension.  In  addition,  students  might  not  have 
developed  appropriate  speaking  skills  to  ask  questions  in  English.  It  is  very  likely 
that  students  will  spend  more  time  on  the  learning  of  EngUsh  and  less  time  on  the 
studies  of  their  own  fields.  Accordingly,  the  students  may  lose  interests  in  their 
original  studies  and  change  their  research  fields  into  the  study  of  English  language 
acquisition.  Consequently,  there  will  be  more  English  majors  and  fewer 
professionals  in  other  important  fields,  such  as  engineering,  technology  and 
medicine,  as  in  the  case  of  numerous  African  countries  (Bocamba  1995).  Third, 
the  assumption  that  the  use  of  local  acrolectal  EngUsh  for  higher  educaUon  can 
improve  students'  English  skills  is  doubtful.  While  teachers'  use  of  English  in 


Yang:  Review  of  Gill  97 

class  can  provide  their  students  with  more  input,  the  question  is  to  what  extent 
students  can  digest  the  input  into  their  intake  and  apply  them  in  actual 
communication.  Finally,  when  English  teachers  focus  on  the  goal  of  helping  their 
students  achieve  the  highest  possible  level  of  English  proficiency,  they  also  need 
to  consider  the  real-world  use  of  English  in  international  communication  (Vande 
Berg  1997).  Crosling  and  Ward  (2002)  report  that  competence  in  formal 
presentation  alone  is  inadequate  for  the  workplace  because  most  verbal 
communication  in  international  companies  is  informal  in  nature.  They  found  that 
informal  English  expressions  are  the  most  frequently  used  forms  in  work-related 
discussions  among  workmates  in  the  same  company  department.  Therefore,  in  the 
case  of  teaching  English  for  international  communication,  there  is  a  need  to 
consider  not  only  linguistic  competence  but  also  sociolinguistic  competence  in  the 
realistic  use  of  English  in  intercultural  exchanges  and  international  business. 

REFERENCES 

BoccAMBA,  Eyamba  G.  1995.  The  politics  of  language  planning  in  Africa:  Critical 

choices  for  the  21st  century.  In:  PuTZ  (ed.),  1 1-27. 
Crosling,  Glenda,  &  Ian  Ward.  2002.  Oral  communication:  The  workplace  need 

and  uses  of  business  graduate  employees.  English  for  Specific  Purposes 

21.41-57. 
PUTZ,    Martin    (ed.).    1995.    Discrimination   through  Language  in  Africa? 

Perspectives  on  the  Namibian  Experience.  Berlin:  Mouton  de  Gruyter. 
Vande  Berg,  C.K.  1997.  Corporate  versus  academic  perceptions  of  the  need  for 

language  fluency.  Journal  of  Language  for  International  Business  8:2.  16- 

21. 


Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences 

University  of  Illinois  -  Department  of  Linguistics 

4080  FLB.  707  South  Mathews  Avenue 

Urbana,  IL  61  SOT 


Please  send  me  the  following  copies  of  Studies  in  the  Linguistic  Sciences: 

4:1  Spring  1974  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

5:1  Spring  1975  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

6:2  Fall  1976  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

7.2  Fall  1977  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

8.1  Spring  1978  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

8.2  Fall  1978  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

9:1  Spring  1979  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

9.2  Fall  1979  Papers  on  Relational  Grammar  and  Semantics 

10.1  Spring  1980Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

11.1  Spring  1981  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

11.2  Fall  1981  Dimensions  of  South  Asian  Linguistics 

12.1  Spring  1982  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

12.2  Fall  1982  Papers  on  Diachronic  Syntax:  Six  Case  Studies 

13.1  Spring  1983  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

13.2  Fall  1983  Studies  in  Language  Variation:  Nonwestem  Case  Studies 

14.1  Spring  1984  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

14.2  Fall  1984  Language  in  African  Culture  and  Society 

15.1  Spring  1985  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

15.2  Fall  1985  Linguistic  Studies  in  Memory  of  Theodore  M.  Lighter 

16.1  Spring  1986Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

16.2  Fall  1986  Illinois  Studies  in  Korean  Linguistics 

17.1  Spring  1987Papers  from  the  1986  Asian  Languages  Analysis  Roundtable 

17.2  Fall  1987  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

18.1  Spring  1988Papers  in  General  Linguistic 

18.2  Fall  1988  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

19.1  Spring  1989Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

19.2  Fall  1989  Contributions  of  African  Linguistics  to  Linguistic  Theory  1 

20.1  Spring  1990  Contributions  of  African  Linguistics  to  Linguistic  Theory  2 

20.2  Fall  1990  Linguistics  for  the  Nineties,  Papers  from  a  Lecture  Series 

in  Celebration  of  the  Department's  25th  Anniversary 

20.3  Meeting  Handbook:  13th  South  Asian  Languages  Analysis  Roundtable, 

25-27  May,  1991,  University  of  Illinois  at  Urbana-Champaign 

21.1  Spring  1991  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

21.2  Fall  1991  Illinois  Studies  in  Korean  Linguistics,  II 

22.1  Spring  1992  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

22.2  Fall  1992.  Twenty-Five  Years  of  Linguistics  at  University  of  Illinois 

23.1  Spring  1993.  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

24.1/2  Spring/Fall  1994  (double  issue)  Proceedings  of  the  4th  FLSMA 

25.2  Fall  1995  Language  and  Gender 

26.1/2  Spring/Fall  1996  (double  issue)  Studies  in  Chinese  Linguistics 

29:2  Fall  1999  Forum  Lectures,  1999  /  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

30:2  Fall  2000  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

31:1  Spring  2001  Diaspora,  Identity,  and  Language  Communities 

32:1  Spring  2002  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

32:2  Fall  2002  Papers  in  General  Linguistics 


$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 
$2.00 

$5.00       , 

$1.00 
$5.00 
$5.00 
$5.00 
$8.00 

$16.00 
$8.00 
$20.00 
$10.00 
$10.00 
$15.00 
$20.00 
$20.00 


NOTE:  Sales  Tax  must  be  included  as  follows  (excluding  organizations): 

IL  7-1/4%;  IN  5%;  MI  6%;  MN  6.5%;  OH  5%  and  WI  5%. 
Checks  or  money  orders  in  U.S.  Dollars,  drawn  on  a  U.S.  Bank,  payable  to: 

University  of  Illinois. 


Check  or  money  order  enclosed  $_ 


Name: 


(Please  add  postage:  $2.00  first  issue,  $1.50 
for  each  additional  issue.) 

□   Contributor  to  SLS  (25%  off) 

Vol.  ,  No.  


e-mail: 


Visit  our 

HOMEPAGE: 

http://www.linguistics.uiuc.e(lu/sls/index.html 

for  information  on  SLS, 


including: 


Editorial  policy, 
Style  Sheet, 

Contents  of  each  issue  to  date. 

Complete  Author  Index, 

Ordering  information  and  Order  Form 


STUDIES  IN  THE  UNGUISTIC  SCIENCES 
VOLUME  32,  NO.  2  (Fall  2002) 


Papers  in  General  Linguistics 

Timothy  L.  Face  and  Scott  M.  Alvord:  Descriptive  adequacy  vs. 
psychological  reality:  The  case  of  two  restrictions  on 
Spanish  stress  placement 

Jose  Ignacio  Hualde  and  Itziar  Aramaio:  Accentual  variation  and 
convergence  in  northeastern  Bizkaian  Basque 

Aimee  Johansen:  Kiswahili  naming  of  days  of  the  week  in  a  wider 
context  of  day  name  borrowings 

Regina  Morin:  English/Spanish  language  contact  on  the  internet: 
Linguistic  borrowing  of  many  stripes 

Keun  Young  Shin:  Two  types  of  negation  not  and  scope  ambiguities 

Asha  Tickoo:  On  information  packaging  and  hearer  engagement 
in  Kashmiri  narrative 


Reviews 


Peter  Lasersohn:  Review  of  Jeffrey  C.  King:  Complex  Demonstratives: 
A  Quantificational  Account 

James  H.  Yang:  Review  of  Saran  Kaur  Gill:  English  Language  Challenges 
for  Malaysia:  International  Communication